Honda 2013 Crosstour Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Crosstour-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-106992 honda-2013-crosstour-unlinked-owners-manual-106992

Owners Manual Pdf P61313 2013 Honda Crosstour Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2013-Honda-Crosstour-Owners-Manual-816784 honda-2013-honda-crosstour-owners-manual-816784 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 571 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2013 Crosstour

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document may not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

Revised 10/13

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find

descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your

particular model.

Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)

represent features and equipment that are available on some, but

not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these

features.

This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and

Canada.

The information and specifications included in this publication were

in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.

reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications

or design at any time without notice and without incurring any

obligation.

2Safe Driving P. 27

For Safe Driving P. 28 Seat Belts P. 32 Airbags P. 39

2Instrument Panel P. 69

Indicators P. 70 Gauges and Displays P. 83

2Controls P. 87

Setting the Clock P. 88 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 91

Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 113

Adjusting the Seats P. 133

Climate Control System* P. 157

2Features P. 163

Audio System P. 164 Audio System Basic Operation P. 169, 182, 215

Customized Features* P. 281 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 318

2Driving P. 409

Before Driving P. 410 Towing a Trailer P. 415

Parking Your Vehicle P. 453

Rearview Camera P. 454

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 455

2Maintenance P. 461

Before Performing Maintenance P. 462 Maintenance Minder™ P. 465

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 493

Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance P. 509

2Handling the Unexpected P. 515

Tools P. 516 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 517

Overheating P. 532 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 534

When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 543

2Information P. 545

Specifications P. 546 Identification Numbers P. 550

Emissions Testing P. 553 Warranty Coverages P. 555

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 0 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Contents

Child Safety P. 54 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66 Safety Labels P. 67

Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 105 Security System P. 107 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 110

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 114 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 130

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 142 Heating and Cooling System* P. 154

Audio Error Messages P. 268 General Information on the Audio System P. 276

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 320, 332, 367 Compass* P. 405, 407

When Driving P. 420 Braking P. 449

Refueling P. 456 Fuel Economy P. 459 Accessories and Modifications P. 460

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 469 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 484

Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497 Battery P. 506 Remote Transmitter Care P. 507

Cleaning P. 510

Engine Does Not Start P. 525 Jump Starting P. 528 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 531

Fuses P. 538 Emergency Towing P. 542

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 544

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 551 Reporting Safety Defects P. 552

Authorized Manuals P. 557 Customer Service Information P. 558

Quick Reference Guide P. 2

Safe Driving P. 27

Instrument Panel P. 69

Controls P. 87

Features P. 163

Driving P. 409

Maintenance P. 461

Handling the Unexpected P. 515

Information P. 545

Index P. 562

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 1 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

❙System Indicators (P 70)

❙Information Display* (P 84)

❙Audio System (P 169, 182, 215)

❙ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 115)

❙Ignition Switch*1 (P 114)

❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 443)

❙Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button* (P 440)

❙Audio/Information Screen (P 186, 218)

❙Seat Heater Switches* (P 153)

❙Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 129)

❙Heating and Cooling System* (P 154)

❙Gauges (P 83)

❙Navigation System*

() See Navigation System Manual

❙Audio with Touch Screen* (P 183, 216)

❙Hazard Warning Button

❙Climate Control System* (P 157)

❙Rear Window Defogger (P 126)

❙Heated Mirror Button (P 126)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 2 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

❙Wipers/Washers (P 123)

❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*

(P224) See Navigation System Manual

❙(+ / (- / / Buttons (P 168)

❙SOURCE Button (P 168)

❙ (Display) Button* (P 186, 218)

❙Headlights/Turn Signals (P 119)

❙Fog Lights (P 122)

❙Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 431)

❙Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 431)

❙Lane WatchTM* (P 444)

❙Horn (Press an area around .)

❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System

Voice Control Buttons (P 320, 332, 367)

❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 84)

❙Brightness Control (P 125)

❙Cruise Control Buttons (P 432)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 3 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide

❙Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 99)

❙Power Window Switches (P 110)

❙Rearview Mirror (P 130)

❙Hood Release Handle (P 471)

❙Shift Lever

Automatic Transmission

(P 425, 426, 428)

❙Glove Box (P 144)

❙Driver’s Front Airbag (P 42)

❙Door Mirror Controls (P 131)

❙Passenger’s Front Airbag

(P 42)

❙Accessory Power Socket

(P 147)

❙Interior Fuse Box

(Passenger’s side) (P 539)

❙Interior Fuse Box (Driver’s side) (P 539)

❙Parking Brake (P 449)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 4 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

❙Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 61)

❙Moonroof Switch (P113 )

❙Map Lights (P 143)

❙Front Seat (P 133)

❙Seat Belts (P 32)

❙Side Airbags (P 46)

❙LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)

❙Ceiling Light (P 142)

❙Side Curtain Airbags (P 49)

❙Grab Handle

❙Cargo Area Light (P 143)

❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 62)

❙Sunglasses Holder (P 152)

❙Accessory Power Socket (P 147)

❙USB Adapter Cable (P 165)

❙Accessory Power Socket (P 147)

❙Auxiliary Input Jack (P 165)

❙Coat Hook (P 148)

❙Center Pocket* (P 152)

❙Rear Seat (P 139)

❙Sun Visors

❙Vanity Mirrors

❙Accessory Power Socket (P 148)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 5 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙Windshield Wipers (P 123, 493)
❙Maintenance Under the Hood (P 469)
❙Fog Lights (P 122, 486)
❙Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P 119, 489)
❙Side Marker Lights (P 119, 488)
❙Tires (P 497, 517)
❙How to Refuel (P 457)
❙Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P 105)
❙Rear Wiper (P 124, 495)
❙Back-Up Lights (P 490)
❙Brake/Taillights (P 490)
❙Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 490)
❙Rear Side Marker Lights (P 490)
❙Multi-View Rear Camera (P 455)
❙Rearview Camera (P 454)
❙Rear License Plate Lights (P 492)
❙Headlights (P 119, 484)
❙Power Door Mirrors (P 131)
❙Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 94)
❙High-Mount Brake Light (P 492)
❙Tailgate Release Button (P 106)
13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 6 ページ ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P 27)

Airbags (P 39)

●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and

your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 54)

●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.

●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.

●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 66)

●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon

monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon

monoxide gas can accumulate.

Before Driving Checklist (P 31)

●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,

steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Seat Belts (P 32)

●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well

back in the seat.

●Check that your passengers are wearing

their seat belts correctly.

Fasten your lap belt as

low as possible.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 7 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Instrument Panel (P 69)

System Indicators

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

Charging System

Indicator

Anti-lock Brake

System (ABS)

Indicator

Vehicle Stability

Assist (VSA®) System

Indicator

VSA® OFF Indicator

Low Tire Pressure

Indicator

Lights Reminders

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Immobilizer System

Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder

Indicator

System Indicators

CRUISE CONTROL

Indicator

Parking Brake and

Brake System

Indicator (Red)

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

Side Airbag Off

Indicator

CRUISE MAIN

Indicator

Tachometer Speedometer

Fuel GaugeSecurity System Alarm

Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Gauges (P 83)/Information Display (P 84)/System Indicators (P 70)

Economy Fuel

Indicator*

TPMS Indicator

Maintenance Minder

Indicator

Washer Level

Indicator*

Temperature Gauge

Electric Power

Steering (EPS) System

Indicator*

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

System Indicators

Canada

U.S. Canada

U.S.

Starter System

Indicator*

Door and Tailgate

Open Indicator

Smart Entry System

Indicator*

Canada

U.S.

Forward Collision

Warning (FCW) Indicator*

Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) Indicator*

M (Sequential shift mode) Indicator/

Shift Indicator*

Daytime Running

Lights Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 8 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P 87)

Clock (P88 )

aPress the DISP button, then select Info

Settings.

bSelect Clock Adjustment.

2(P88)

cRotate to change hour, then press

dRotate to change minute, then

press .

Models without navigation system

Audio system with touch screen

aPress the CLOCK button until you hear

a beep. The displayed time begins

flashing.

bPress the (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)

button to set the time. Press the (6

(Reset) button to set the time to the

nearest hour.

cPress the CLOCK button again to set

the time.

The navigation system receives signals from

GPS satellites, updating the clock

automatically.

Audio system without touch screen

Models with navigation system

These indicators are used to show how to

operate the selector knob or the MENU/SEL

(Menu/Selector) knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 9 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

ENGINE START/STOP

Button* (P115 )

Turn Signals (P119)

Lights (P119)

Turn Signal Control Lever

Right

Left

Light Control Switches

Low Beam

High Beam

Flashing

Wipers and Washers

(P123)

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Adjustment Ring

: Long Delay

: Short Delay

MIST

OFF

INT: Low speed with intermittent

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Pull toward

you to spray

washer fluid.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 10 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Steering Wheel (P129)

●To adjust, push the adjustment lever

down, adjust to the desired position, then

lock the lever back in place.

Tailgate (P105)

●With all the doors unlocked, push the

tailgate release button on the tailgate to

open it.

●Touch the tailgate release button to

unlock and open the tailgate.

Models with smart entry system

Power Door Mirrors

(P131)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, move

the selector switch to L or R.

●Push the appropriate edge of the

adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

Power Windows (P110)

●With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, open

and close the power windows.

●If the power window lock button is in the

off position, each passenger’s window

can be opened and closed with its own

switch.

●If the power window lock button is in the

on position (indicator is on), each

passenger’s window switch is disabled.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have

an ENGINE START/STOP button

instead of an ignition switch.

Power Window Lock Button

Window

Switch

Indicator

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 11 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Heating and Cooling System* (P154)

●Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed and airflow.

●Press the Mode buttons ( / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.

●Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.

●Use the button for maximum cool setting.

●Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.

●Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Fan Control Dial

(Rear Window Defogger/

Heated Mirror) Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents, and back of the

center console.

Air flows from dashboard vents,

and back of the center console.

Button

(Recirculation) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Button Button

Mode Buttons

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 12 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System* (P157)

●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

●Press the button to turn the system on or off.

●Press the button to defrost the windshield.

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 226)

Models with audio touch screen

Driver’s Side Temperature

Control Switch

(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror)

Button

(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

Air flows from floor and windshield

defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

Air flows from floor and dashboard

vents, and back of the center console.

Air flows from dashboard vents and

back of the center console.

AUTO Button

(On/Off) Button

(Recirculation) Button

MODE Control Button

/ (Fan Control)

Buttons

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Switch

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 13 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

●Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

●Press the button to turn the system on or off.

●Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models without audio touch screen

Driver’s Side Temperature

Control Switch

/ (Fan Control) Buttons

(Windshield Defroster) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

SYNC (Synchronized) Button

(Recirculation) Button

AUTO Button

Passenger’s Side Temperature

Control Switch

(Rear Window Defogger/

Heated Mirror) Button

MODE Control Button

(On/Off) Button

Air flows from floor and

dashboard vents, and back of the

center console.

Air flows from dashboard vents,

and back of the center console.

Air flows from floor and

windshield defroster vents.

Air flows from floor vents.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 14 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P 163)

Audio Remote Controls

(P 168)

●(+ / (- Button

Press and release to adjust the volume up/

down.

●SOURCE Button

Press and release to change the audio

mode: FM/AM/CD/XM®*/HDD*/USB/iPod®/

Bluetooth/Pandora®*/AhaTM*/AUX.

● / Button

Radio:Press and release to change the

preset station.

Press and hold to select the next or

previous strong station.

CD/HDD*/USB device:

Press and release to skip to the

beginning of the next song or

return to the beginning of the

current song.

Press and hold to change a folder.

(+ / (- / / Button

SOURCE

Button

Audio System (P169, 182, 215)

(P169)

Audio system without touch screen

RETURN Button

FM Button

SCAN Button

Selector Knob

AM Button

VOL/PWR

(Volume/Power)

Knob

CD Button AUX Button

CD Slot

(CD Eject)

Button

Preset Buttons

(1-6)

TITLE Button

/ (Skip)

Bar

MENU Button

LOAD Button

FOLDER Bar

A.SEL (Auto Select)

Button

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 15 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

BACK Button

MENU/SEL (Menu/Selector)

Knob

(Tune Down) Icon*1

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

Models without navigation system

Audio/Information Screen

Touch Screen

Button

Source*1

VOL/ (Volume/Power)

Knob

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

Presets*1

Clock/Screen*1

DISP Button

(Tune Up) Icon*1

More*1

(P 182)

Audio system with touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 16 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

CD Slot

(CD Eject) Button

MENU Button

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

(P 215)

Models with navigation system

Audio/Information Screen

Touch Screen

Button

Source*1

VOL (Volume) Knob

(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

Presets*1

(Tune Up) Icon*1

More*1

(Power) Button

(Tune Down) Icon*1

INFO Button

AUDIO Button

SETTINGS Button

BACK Button

NAV Button

PHONE Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 17 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P409)

Release Button

Shift Lever

Automatic Transmission (P426, 428)

●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.

Shifting

Park

Turn off or start the engine.

Transmission is locked.

Reverse

Used when reversing.

Neutral

Transmission is not locked.

Drive

Normal driving.

On models with paddle shifter,

D-paddle shift mode can be used.

Drive (D3)

Used when:

•Going up or down hills

•Towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Second

Used to increase engine braking (the

transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

First

Used to further increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

Models with

paddle shifter

Models without

paddle shifter

S Position

Sequential shift mode can be used.

Models with paddle shifter

Models without paddle shifter

Paddle Shifters (P431)

●Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a

manual transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for

engine braking.

●D-paddle shift mode: The transmission will shift back to

automatic mode once the system detects that the vehicle

is cruising.

●Sequential shift mode: Holds the selected gear, and the M

indicator comes on.

●The selected gear position is shown in the instrument

panel.

Shift Down (-

Paddle Shifter

Shift Up (+

Paddle Shifter

Selected Gear

Number

M Indicator

Shift Lever

Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and

press the release button to

move out of (P.

Move the shift lever without

pressing the release button.

Press the release button to move

the shift lever.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 18 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® OFF Button (P 443)

●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system

helps stabilize the vehicle during

cornering, and helps maintain traction

while accelerating on loose or slippery

road surfaces.

●VSA® comes on automatically every time

you start the engine.

●To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold

the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P 432)

●Cruise control allows you to maintain a

set speed without keeping your foot on

the accelerator pedal.

●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE

button, then press –/SET once you have

received the desired speed (above 25 mph

or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) (P 446)

●TPMS monitors tire pressure.

●TPMS is turned on automatically every

time you start the engine.

Refueling (P 456)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or

higher required

Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 L)

aUnlock the driver’s door.

bPress on the edge of the

fuel fill door to make it

pop up slightly.

cTurn the fuel fill cap

slowly to remove the

cap.

dPlace the cap in the

holder on the fuel fill

door.

eAfter refueling, screw

the cap back on until it

clicks at least once.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 19 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P 461)

Under the Hood (P 469)

●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer

fluid. Add when necessary.

●Check brake fluid.

●Check the battery regularly.

aPull the hood release handle under the corner of the

dashboard.

bLocate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up

the hood.

cWhen finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly

locked in place.

Lights (P 484)

●Inspect all lights regularly.

Wiper Blades (P 493)

●Replace blades if they leave streaks

across the windshield.

Tires (P 497)

●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.

●Check tire pressures regularly.

●Install snow tires for winter

driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 20 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Handling the Unexpected (P 515)

Flat Tire (P 517)

●Park in a safe location and replace the

flat tire with the compact spare tire in the

cargo area.

Indicators Come On

(P 534)

●Identify the indicator and consult the

owner’s manual.

Engine Won’t Start

(P 525)

●If the battery is dead, jump start using a

booster battery.

Blown Fuse (P 538)

●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical

device does not operate.

Overheating (P 532)

●Park in a safe location. If you do not see

steam under the hood, open the hood,

and let the engine cool down.

Emergency Towing

(P 542)

●Call a professional towing service if you

need to tow your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 21 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

What to Do If

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

The ignition switch does

not turn from (0 to (q*1.

Why?

●The steering wheel may be locked.

●Try to turn the steering wheel left and right

while turning the ignition key*.

●Move the steering wheel left and right while

pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button* at

the same time.

The ignition switch does

not turn from (q to (0*1

and I cannot remove the

key. Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal

pulsate slightly when

applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a

problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never

pump the brake pedal.

The rear door cannot be

opened from inside the

vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the

lock position. If so, open the rear

door with the outside door handle.

To cancel this function, push the

lever to the unlock position.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 22 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

Why do the doors lock

after I unlocked the doors

using a remote

transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are

relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper

sound when I open the

driver’s door?

The beeper sounds when:

●The key is left in the ignition switch*.

●The power mode* is in ACCESSORY.

●The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper

sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when:

●Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

●The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching

sound when I apply the

brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 23 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related

to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

•How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the

circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

WARNING: This product contains or emits

chemicals known to the state of California to cause

cancer and birth defects or other reproductive

harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,

and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that

have the special equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by

anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the

vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record

information about powertrain performance. The data can be used

to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians

diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with

data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains

confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this

vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may

apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded

by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid

damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

NOTICE

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 24 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Quick Reference Guide

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And

operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have

provided operating procedures and other information on labels and

in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that

could hurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the

hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You

must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,

including:

●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.

●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and

one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.

These signal words mean:

●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.

●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.

●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please

read it carefully.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don’t follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if

you don’t follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

instructions.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 25 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 26 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions ............. 28

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 30

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts........................ 32

Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35

Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38

Airbags

Airbag System Components............... 39

Types of Airbags ................................ 42

Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42

Side Airbags....................................... 46

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 49

Airbag System Indicators.................... 50

Airbag Care ....................................... 53

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54

Safety of Infants and Small Children .......56

Safety of Larger Children ................... 64

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 66

Safety Labels

Label Locations .................................. 67

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 27 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

For Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them

properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the

most important.

Important Safety Precautions

■Always wear your seat belt

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped

with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

■Restrain all children

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the

front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger

children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the

belt properly without a booster seat.

■Be aware of airbag hazards

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants

who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,

and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and

warnings in this manual.

■Don’t drink and drive

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to

changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.

So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions

Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use

of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the

driver while driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 28 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

Safe Driving

■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying

close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.

Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to

divert some attention away from driving.

■Control your speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher

the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.

Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

■Keep your vehicle in safe condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition

frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 29 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Safe Driving

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and

your passengers.

1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that

work together to help protect you and your

passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part.

These include a strong steel framework that forms a

safety cage around the passenger compartment,

front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering

column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat

belts in a sufficient crash.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full

advantage of these features unless you remain seated

in the correct position and always wear your seat

belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to

injuries if they are not used properly.

Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

Seat Belts

Front Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

Seat Belt Tensioners

Occupant Position Detection

System (OPDS) Sensor

Side Airbags

Door Locks

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 30 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items

each time before you drive.

•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are

closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant

from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the

tailgate.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 99

•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are

adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the

vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a

crash.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 133

•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective

when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller

persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 136

•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any

passengers are properly belted as well.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height

and weight.

2Child Safety P. 54

■Safety CheckList

1Safety CheckList

If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door

and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all

doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes

off.

2Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 74

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 31 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you

connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety

features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the

vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat

belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full

advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.

In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:

-frontal impacts

-side impacts

-rear impacts

-rollovers

■Lap/shoulder seat belts

All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency

locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping

some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to

restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with

child seats.

2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 61

1About Your Seat Belts

Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every

crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your

risk of serious injury.

Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories

require you to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases

the chance of serious injury or death in a

crash, even though your vehicle has

airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 32 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 33

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

■Proper use of seat belts

Follow these guidelines for proper use:

•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position

for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of

the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or

behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort

or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability

and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1

before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, a

beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.

If the driver does not fasten the belt before

the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.

The beeper will also periodically sound and

the indicator will blink while driving until the

driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts are

fastened.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Seat Belt Reminder

1About Your Seat Belts

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends

the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If

this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the

seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.

Then refasten the belt.

1Seat Belt Reminder

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger

does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after

the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.

When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,

or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator

will not come on.

This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot

detect their presence.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 33 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-

severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to

inflate the front airbags.

■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.

If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come

on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and

thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not

offer protection in a subsequent crash.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 34 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt

Continued

Safe Driving

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2Adjusting the Seats P. 133

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then

tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is

secure.

uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or

caught on anything.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat

belt or one that does not appear to be working

correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working

properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.

Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or

retractor mechanism.

Pull out slowly.

Correct

Seated

Posture.

Latch

Plate

Buckle

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 35 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as

possible across your hips, then pull up on

the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part

fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic

bones take the force of a crash and reduces

the chance of internal injuries.

4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to

remove any slack, then check that the belt

rests across the center of your chest and

over your shoulder. This spreads the forces

of a crash over the strongest bones in your

upper body.

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter

occupants.

1. Move the anchor up and down while

holding the release button.

2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests

across the center of your chest and over

your shoulder.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then

guide the belt by hand until it has retracted

completely.

When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of

the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

WARNING

Improperly positioning the seat belts can

cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly

positioned before driving.

Lap belt

as low as

possible

■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four

levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height

one level at a time.

After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder

anchor position is secure.

Push

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 36 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSeat Belts uFastening a Seat Belt

Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when

driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the

belt as low as possible across the hips.

■Advice for Pregnant Women

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is

okay for you to drive.

To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your

unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front

airbag:

•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far

back as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle.

•When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust

the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the shoulder belt

across the chest avoiding

the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the

belt as low as possible

across the hips.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 37 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Safe Driving

Seat Belt Inspection

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.

•Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.

uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only

use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make

sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper

protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of

protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after

any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can

result in serious injury or death if the seat

belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have

any problem corrected as soon as possible.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 38 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued

Safe Driving

Airbags

Airbag System Components

78 91011 12 8 10

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 39 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain

airbags are deployed according to the

direction and severity of impact. Both side

curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.

The airbag system includes:

aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored

in the center of the steering wheel; the

front passenger’s airbag is stored in the

dashboard. Both are marked SRS

AIRBAG.

bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and

one for a front passenger. The airbags are

stored in the outer edges of the seat-

backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each

side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored

in the ceiling, above the side windows.

The front and rear pillars are marked

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

dAn electronic control unit that continually

monitors and records information about

the sensors, the airbag activators, the

seat belt tensioners, and driver and front

passenger seat belt use when the ignition

switch is in ON (w*1.

eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. The

driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts

incorporate sensors that detect whether

or not they are fastened.

fA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat

is too far forward, the airbag will inflate

with less force.

gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s

seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be

turned off if the weight on the seat is 65

lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant

or small child).

hImpact sensors that can detect a

moderate-to-severe front or side

collision.

iAn indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger’s front

airbag has been turned off.

jSensors that can detect if a child or small

statured adult is in the deployment path

of the front passenger’s side airbag.

kAn indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your

airbag system or seat belt tensioners.

lAn indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you that the front passenger’s side

airbag has been turned off.

mSafing Sensor

nA rollover sensor that detects whether

the vehicle is about to roll over.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 40 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with

tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,

and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing

their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as

far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the

vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as

possible.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that

can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags

deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp

object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the

covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags

or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

■Important Facts About Your Airbags

1Important Facts About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,

airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

When driving, keep hands and arms out of the

deployment path of the front airbag by holding each

side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over

the airbag cover.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 41 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Safe Driving

Types of Airbags

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:

•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.

•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.

•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.

Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect

the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to

supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary

restraint system.

The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and

in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Housing Locations

1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch

is in ON (w*1.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a

small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion

process of the inflator material and is not harmful.

People with respiratory problems may experience

some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of

the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

1Front Airbags (SRS)

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags

(SRS)

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiple-

threshold front airbags (SRS).

During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or

both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate

at different rates, depending on the severity of the

crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/

or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to

supplement the seat belts to help reduce the

likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal

crashes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 42 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 43

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.

When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control

unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a

vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the

front airbag provides supplemental protection

for your head and chest.

The front airbags deflate immediately so that

they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility

or the ability to steer or operate other

controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not

aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

■Operation

■How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags

normally inflate within a split second of each other, it

is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can

happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,

or threshold, that determines whether or not the

airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will

provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental

protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 43 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

■When front airbags should not deploy

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and

help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur

during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.

Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration

causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side

airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the

severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which

can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.

Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear

impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed

to deploy in such collisions.

Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags

and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags

could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a

rollover.

■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the

vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.

Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object

that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is

underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.

■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage

appears severe

Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of

visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some

collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags

would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they

had deployed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 44 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Safe Driving

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag

related injuries to smaller occupants.

The driver’s advanced front airbag system

includes a seat position sensor.

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag

inflates with less force, regardless of the

severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced front airbag system

has weight sensors.

Although we recommends against carrying an

infant or small child in front, if the sensors

detect the weight of a child (up to about 65

lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically

turn off the passenger’s front airbag.

■Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position

sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag

will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the

driver’s seating position.

For both advanced front airbags to work properly:

•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.

•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.

•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on

the floor. Improperly positioned objects can

interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.

•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat

belts properly.

•Do not place any cover over the passenger side

dashboard.

Driver’s

Seat

Position

Sensor

Passenger’s

Seat

Weight

Sensors

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 45 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

Side Airbags

The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger

during a moderate to severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside

edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-

backs.

Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

When the sensors detect a moderate-to-

severe side impact, the control unit signals the

side airbag on the impact side to immediately

inflate.

■Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.

They can interfere with the proper operation of the

airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the airbag

may not deploy when there is no passenger in the

front passenger seat.

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers

without consulting a dealer.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back

covers can prevent your side airbags from properly

deploying during a side impact.

Housing

Location

■Operation

When

inflated

Side

Airbag

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 46 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side

of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there

may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough

impact to deploy the airbag.

■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears

severe

It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in

apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards

the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts

absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have

been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 47 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Safe Driving

To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side

airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:

•The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front

passenger seat.

•The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the

deployment path of the side airbag.

When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes

on.

2Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 52

If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few

seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be

turned on, and the indicator will go off.

If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit

properly restrained in a rear seat.

■Side Airbag Cutoff System

■Side Airbag Off Indicator

1Side Airbag Cutoff System

The sensors that monitor the front passenger’s height

and body position may not work if:

•The seat-back is wet

•The passenger is touching a metal or other

electrical conductive object

•A seat cushion is on the seat

•The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing

Sensor that

monitor the

passenger’s height.

Sensor that monitor the

passenger’s position.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 48 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

Side Curtain Airbags

Side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer

seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags

equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly

rollover crashes.

The side curtain airbags are located in the

ceiling above the side windows on both sides

of the vehicle.

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy

in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side

impact.

■Housing Locations

1Side Curtain Airbags

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is

about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side

curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt

tensioners.

The airbag on the passenger’s side will deploy, and

the seat belt tensioner will activate, even if there are

no passengers on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from the side curtain

airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts

properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.

Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof

pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation

of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■Operation

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 49 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal

collision.

In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Airbag System Indicators

If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■When the ignition switch is turned to

ON (w*1

The indicator comes on for a few seconds,

then goes off. This tells you the system is

working properly.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the

system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat

belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

WARNING

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in

serious injury or death if the airbag systems

or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts

you to a possible problem.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 50 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 51

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■When the passenger airbag off

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.

This occurs when the front passenger’s weight

sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the

weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.

2Child Safety P. 54

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and

the indicator will not come on.

■Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and

no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult

riding there, something may be interfering with the

weight sensors. Such as:

•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back

pocket.

•A child seat or other object pressing against the

rear of the seat-back.

•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of

the front passenger’s seat.

•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

•An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and

goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is

near the airbag cutoff threshold.

U.S. Canada

Models with audio

touch screen

Models without audio

touch screen

U.S. Canada

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 51 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Safe Driving

■When the side airbag off indicator comes on

This indicator comes on if the passenger’s side

airbag has been turned off because the

passenger is too small to be sitting in the front

seat, is slouching or not sitting upright, or has

leaned into the airbag’s deployment path.

Unless the passenger is a smaller statured

adult or a child, the indicator should go off

when the passenger returns to a proper

upright sitting position.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Side Airbag Off Indicator

1Side Airbag Off Indicator

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, the

indicator should come on for a few seconds and then

go out. If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes on

while driving without a passenger in the front seat,

have the system checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

Canada

U.S.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 52 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Safe Driving

Airbag Care

You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any

airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

■When the airbags have deployed

If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.

Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be

replaced.

■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision

Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s

seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt

tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer

This would likely disable the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the

passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate

a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American

Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,

Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

1Airbag Care

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag

system components, including the airbag, tensioners,

sensors, and control unit.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 53 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are

either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the

number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province

and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride

in a vehicle.

Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:

•An inflating front or side airbag can injure

or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

•A child in the front seat is more likely to

interfere with the driver’s ability to safely

control the vehicle.

•Statistics show that children of all sizes and

ages are safer when they are properly

restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport Canada recommend

that all children age 12 and under be properly

restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/

territories have laws restricting where children may

ride.

WARNING

Children who are unrestrained or

improperly restrained can be seriously

injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be

properly restrained in a child seat. A larger

child should be properly restrained with a

seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 54 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

Safe Driving

•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an

approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the

event of a collision.

•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would

likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very

seriously injured in a crash.

•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when

the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate

vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag

hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning

labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the

front visors. Please read and follow the instructions

on these labels.

2Safety Labels P. 67

WARNING

Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or

wrap one around their neck can result in

serious injury or death.

Instruct children not to play with any seat

belt and make sure any unused seat belt a

child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,

and locked.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 55 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Safety of Infants and Small Children

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the

infant reaches the seat maker’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is

at least one year old.

■Positioning a rear-facing child seat

Child seats must be placed and secured in a

rear seating position.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front

passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back

in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag

system.

2Airbags P. 39

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front

passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.

Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

■Protecting Infants

1Protecting Infants

Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a

forward facing position.

Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions before installation.

WARNING

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front

seat can result in serious injury or death

during a crash.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the

rear seat, not the front.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 56 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 57

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child

seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured

forward-facing child seat.

■Forward-facing child seat placement

We strongly recommend placing a forward-

facing child seat in a rear seating position.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with

advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A

rear seat is the safest place for a child.

■Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations

regarding child seat use where you are driving, and

follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat

up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are

appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

WARNING

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the

front seat can result in serious injury or

death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child

seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far

back as possible, and properly restrain the

child.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 57 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).

Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both

are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be

installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat

manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.

Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible

child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.

This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured

with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat

manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat

once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual

for proper installation instructions.

■Important consideration when selecting a child seat

Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:

•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.

•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.

•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

■Selecting a Child Seat

1Selecting a Child Seat

Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is

simple.

LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed

to simplify the installation process and reduce the

likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 58 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Continued

Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.

A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of

connectors.

1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then

attach the child seat to the lower anchors

according to the instructions that came

with the child seat.

uWhen installing the child seat, make sure

that the lower anchors are not

obstructed by the seat belt or any other

object.

■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Marks

Rigid Type

Lower Anchors

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 59 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the

seat-back.

4. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

between the head restraint legs, and secure

the tether strap hook onto the anchor.

Make sure the strap is not twisted.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat maker.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

Flexible Type

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat

installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the

seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat

that is not properly secured will not adequately

protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the

child or other vehicle occupants.

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Anchor Cover

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 60 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 61

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat

according to the seat maker’s instructions,

and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all

the way out until it stops. This activates the

lockable retractor.

4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into

the retractor, then try to pull it out to make

sure the retractor is locked.

uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt

out, the lockable retractor is not

activated. Pull the seat belt all the way

out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near

the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack

from the lap part of the belt.

uWhen doing this, place your weight on

the child seat and push it into the vehicle

seat.

■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

A child seat that is not properly secured will not

adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause

injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 61 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by

rocking it forward and back and side to

side; little movement should be felt.

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child

can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor

is activated, and the belt is fully retracted

and locked.

A tether anchorage point is provided behind

each rear seating position. A child seat that is

installed with a seat belt and comes with a

tether can use the tether for additional

security.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle

and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

■Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchorage Points

1Adding Security with a Tether

Since a tether can provide additional security to the

lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend

using a tether whenever one is available.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 62 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

■Using an outer anchor

1. Raise the head restraint to its highest

position, then route the tether strap

through the head restraint legs. Make sure

the strap is not twisted.

2. Open the anchor cover.

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the

anchor.

4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

■Using the center anchor

1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest

position.

2. Open the anchor cover.

3. Route the tether strap over the head

restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

4. Secure the tether strap hook onto the

anchor.

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the

child seat manufacturer.

Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Cover

Outer Position

Tether

Strap

Hook

Anchor

Cover

Center Position

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 63 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe Driving

Safety of Larger Children

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind

of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who

must sit in front.

When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/

shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the

following questions.

■Checklist

•Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over

the edge of the seat?

•Does the shoulder belt cross between the

child’s neck and arm?

•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs?

•Will the child be able to stay seated like this

for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder

seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a

booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

■Protecting Larger Children

■Checking Seat Belt Fit

1Safety of Larger Children

WARNING

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in

front can result in injury or death if the

passenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front, move the

vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,

have the child sit up properly and wear the

seat belt properly, using a booster seat if

needed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 64 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used

properly, position the child in a booster seat in

a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,

check that the child meets the booster seat

manufacturer’s recommendations.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever

have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information

in this manual.

•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.

•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the

seat.

■Monitoring child passengers

We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more

mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up

properly.

■Booster Seats

1Booster Seats

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the

instructions that came with it, and install the seat

accordingly.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a

booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat

belt correctly.

Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and

territories require children to use a booster seat until

they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60

lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or

province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 65 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,

odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon

monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever

•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.

•The exhaust system may have been damaged.

•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.

When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into

the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate

open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system*/climate control

system* as shown below.

1. Select the fresh air mode.

2. Select the mode.

3. Set the fan speed to high.

4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

Adjust the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* in the same manner

if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up

with carbon monoxide gas.

Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.

Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the

garage immediately after starting the engine.

WARNING

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.

Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and

even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that

expose you to carbon monoxide.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 66 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Safe Driving

Safety Labels

Label Locations

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels

carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer

for a replacement.

Sun Visor

U.S. models Canadian models

Radiator Cap

U.S. models

U.S. models only

Dashboard

Canadian models

Doorjambs

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 67 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 68 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Instrument Panel

This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 70

Information Display Warning and

Information Messages...................... 82

Gauges and Displays

Gauges.............................................. 83

Information Display............................ 84

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 69 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Instrument Panel

Indicators

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Parking Brake

and Brake

System Indicator

(Red)

●Comes on for a few seconds when you

turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then

goes off.

●Comes on when the parking brake is

applied, and goes off when it is released.

●Comes on when the brake fluid level is

low.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the

brake system.

●The beeper sounds and the indicator

comes on if you drive with the parking

brake not fully released.

●Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking

brake is released. Check the brake fluid level.

2What to do when the indicator comes on while

driving P. 536

●Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have

the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

P. 536

Low Oil Pressure

Indicator

●Comes on when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when the

engine starts.

●Comes on when the engine oil pressure is

low.

●Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe

place.

2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 534

U.S.

Canada

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 70 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Malfunction

Indicator Lamp

●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch

to ON (w*1, and goes off either when the

engine starts or after several seconds if the

engine is not started. If “readiness codes”

have not been set, it blinks five times before it

goes off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the

emissions control system.

●Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s cylinders

is detected.

●Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics

for the emissions control systems.

2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 553

●Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle checked

by a dealer.

●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where

there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for

10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.

Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.

2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks P. 535

Charging System

Indicator

●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch

to ON (w*1, and goes off when the engine

starts.

●Comes on when the battery is not charging.

●Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating and

cooling system*/climate control system* and rear

defogger in order to reduce electricity consumption.

2If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

P. 534

Seat Belt

Reminder

Indicator

●Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are

not wearing a seat belt when you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w*1.

●If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt,

the indicator comes on about six seconds later.

●Blinks while driving if either you or the front

passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The

beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at

regular intervals.

●The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you

and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.

●Stays on after you or the front passenger has

fastened the seat belt - A detection error may have

occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

2Seat Belt Reminder P. 33

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 71 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Shift Lever

Position

Indicator

●Indicates in which position your shift lever is.

2Shifting P. 426, 428

M (sequential

shift mode)

Indicator/Gear

Position

Indicator*

●Comes on when the sequential shift mode is

applied.

2Sequential Shift Mode P. 430

Transmission

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Blinks if the transmission system has a

problem.

●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and

acceleration and have the vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

Low Fuel

Indicator

●Comes on when the fuel reserve is running

low (approximately 2.5 U.S. gal./9.6 Liter

left on 2WD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal./10.5

Liter left on 4WD models).

●Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel

gauge.

●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.

●Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 72 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

ABS (Anti-lock

Brake System)

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●If it comes on at any other time, there is a

problem with the ABS.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has

normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 451

Supplemental

Restraint System

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on if a problem with any of the

following is detected:

-Supplemental restraint system

-Side airbag system

-Side curtain airbag system

-Seat belt tensioner

●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

System Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Blinks when VSA® is active.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®

system.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

2VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC

(Electronic Stability Control), System P. 442

VSA® (Vehicle

Stability Assist)

OFF Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.

2VSA® On and Off P. 443

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 73 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Door and Tailgate

Open Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the

ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on if any door or the tailgate is not

completely closed.

●The beeper sounds and the indicator comes

on if any door or the tailgate is opened

while driving.

●Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.

EPS (Electric

Power Steering)

System Indicator*

●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch

to ON (w*1, and goes off when the engine

starts.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS

(Electric Power Steering) System.

●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2If the EPS System Indicator Comes On P. 536

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 74 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

TPMS Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the

TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is

temporarily installed.

●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all -

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is

fitted with a compact spare, get your regular tire

repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as

soon as you can.

Low Tire Pressure

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Comes on if the tire pressure of any of the

tires becomes significantly low.

●Comes on for a while and then goes off

when a compact spare tire is temporarily

installed.

●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,

check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if

necessary.

Fuel Economy

Indicator*

●Comes on while the engine is operating in its

most economical range. —

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 75 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Forward

Collision

Warning

(FCW)

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds

when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Comes on when you have

customized FCW to turn off.

●Comes on if there is a problem

with the FCW system.

●Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●Blinks when the system detects

a likely collision with a vehicle

in front of you. The beeper

sounds.

●Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent

a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.). —

●Comes on when the FCW

system shuts itself off.

●Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too

high. The system activates when the temperature inside the

system cools down.

2Automatic shutoff P. 437

●Stays on - The radar sensor or the area around the camera

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe

place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth.

●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if:

The indicator and message come back on after you cleaned

the area around the camera.

2Automatic shutoff P. 437

2Automatic shutoff P. 437 —

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 76 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message

Lane Departure

Warning (LDW)

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when

you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with

the LDW system.

●Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer.

●Blinks when your vehicle is too close

to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.

●Blinks while driving - Take

appropriate action to keep your vehicle

within the lane lines.

—

●Comes on when the LDW system

shuts itself off.

●Stays on - The temperature inside the

LDW camera is too high.

The system activates when the

temperature inside the camera cools

down.

2LDW Camera P. 440

●Stays on - The area around the camera

is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your

vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off

with a soft cloth.

●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if

the indicator and message come back

on after you cleaned the area around

the camera.

2LDW Camera P. 440

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 77 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Smart Entry

System Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when you

change the power mode to ON.

●Comes on as soon as a problem is detected

in the smart entry system or push button

starting system.

●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Starter System

Indicator*

●Comes on for a few seconds when you set

the power mode to ON, then goes off.

●Comes on if the starting system has a

problem.

●As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE

START/STOP button for 15 seconds while pressing

the brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have

the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Turn Signal and

Hazard Warning

Indicators

●The turn signal indicators blink when you

operate the turn signal lever.

●If you press the hazard warning button, both

indicators and all turn signals blink at the

same time.

●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal

light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 489, 490

U.S.

Canada

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 78 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Continued

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

High Beam

Indicator

●Comes on when the high beam headlights

are on. —

Lights On

Indicator

●Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or

in AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

●If you remove the key from the ignition switch or set

the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) while the exterior lights are on, a chime

sounds when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Light

Indicator

●Comes on when the fog lights are on. —

Daytime Running

Lights Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Comes on if there is a problem with the DRL

system.

●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Daytime Running Lights P. 122

Side Airbag Off

Indicator

●Comes on for a few seconds when you turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes

off.

●Comes on when the passenger side airbag

system is automatically shut off.

●It does not mean there is a problem with your side

airbags.

●Comes on when nobody is sitting in the

passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked by a

dealer.

●Comes on when someone is sitting in the seat -

Have the passenger sit properly.

U.S.

Canada

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 79 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

Immobilizer

System Indicator

●Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition

switch to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot

recognize the key information.

●Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition

switch to LOCK (0*1, pull the key out, and then insert

the key and turn it to ON (w*1 again.

●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be

malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

●Do not attempt to alter this system or add other

devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Security System

Alarm Indicator

●Blinks when the security system alarm has

been set. 2Security System Alarm P. 107

Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 80 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsu

Instrument Panel

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation

CRUISE MAIN

Indicator

●Comes on when you press the CRUISE

button. 2Cruise Control P. 432

CRUISE

CONTROL

Indicator

●Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise

control. 2Cruise Control P. 432

Washer Level

Indicator*

●Comes on when washer fluid gets low. ●Refill washer fluid.

2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 483

Maintenance

Minder Indicator

●Comes on when you turn the ignition switch

to ON (w*1, then goes off.

●Comes on when the scheduled maintenance

is due soon.

2Maintenance Minder™ P. 465

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 81 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

Instrument Panel

Information Display Warning and Information Messages

The following messages appear only on the information display.

Message Condition Explanation

●Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2Check Fuel Cap Message P. 535

Message Condition Explanation

●Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button

to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P.

●Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after

moving the shift lever to (P.

●Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. —

●Appears when the steering wheel is locked. ●Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing

the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

●Appears when you close the door with the power mode

in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

●Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back

inside the vehicle and close the door.

●Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery

becomes weak.

●Replace the battery as soon as possible.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 507

Models with smart entry system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 82 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Instrument Panel

Gauges and Displays

Gauges

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.

They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Speedometer

■Tachometer

■Fuel Gauge

■Temperature Gauge

1Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches .

Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,

damaging the catalytic converter.

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from

the fuel gauge reading.

1Temperature Gauge

NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the

upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull

safely to the side of the road and allow engine

temperature to return to normal.

2Overheating P. 532

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 83 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Instrument Panel

Information Display

The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and

maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

Press the (Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

Each time you press the knob, the information

display changes as follows:

Some of the items on the information display also

appear on the audio/information screen*. They also

change along with the information display changes

while the fuel consumption is shown.

Outside Temperature*,

Trip Meter B

Engine Oil Life

Odometer, Trip Meter A

Outside Temperature*,

Trip Meter A

■Odometer

Select/Reset

Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 84 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 85

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last

reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is

reset to 0.0.

Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

2Maintenance Minder™ P. 465

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.

2Check Fuel Cap Message P. 535

■Trip Meter

■Engine Oil Life

■Check Fuel Cap

1Trip Meter

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by

pressing the knob.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 85 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

Instrument Panel

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■Adjusting the outside temperature display

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading

seems incorrect.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the

outside temperature is shown on the information display.

uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display

starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).

3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.

uThe adjustment is complete.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Outside Temperature*

1Outside Temperature

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road

heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the

temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less

than 19 mph (30 km/h).

It may take several minutes for the display to be

updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

Use the audio/information screen’s customized

features to correct the temperature.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with audio touch screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 86 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Controls

This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 88

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions .................... 91

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength

.. 93

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside ............................................ 94

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside ............................................... 99

Childproof Door Locks ..................... 100

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 101

Opening and Closing the Tailgate... 105

Security System ................................ 107

Immobilizer System .......................... 107

Security System Alarm...................... 107

Opening and Closing the Windows..... 110

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

.. 113

Operating the Switches Around the

Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch*............................... 114

ENGINE START/STOP Button*........... 115

Ignition Switch and Power Mode

Comparison ................................... 118

Turn Signals..................................... 119

Light Switches.................................. 119

Fog Lights........................................ 122

Daytime Running Lights ................... 122

Wipers and Washers ........................ 123

Brightness Control ........................... 125

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button.. 126

Driving Position Memory System*.... 127

Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 129

Adjusting the Mirrors....................... 130

Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 130

Power Door Mirrors ......................... 131

Adjusting the Seats .......................... 133

Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 133

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience

Items ................................................ 142

Interior Lights .................................. 142

Interior Convenience Items .............. 144

Heating and Cooling System*......... 154

Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 154

Climate Control System*.................. 157

Using Automatic Climate Control .... 157

Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 162

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 87 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Controls

Setting the Clock

Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

■Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Info Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock

Adjustment.

3. Rotate to change hour, then press .

4. Rotate to change minute, then press .

■Using the audio touch screen

1. Select .

2. Select Clock.

3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting

4. Select 12H or 24H.

5. Press Set to set the time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Adjusting the Time

1Clock

The clock is automatically updated through the

navigation system, so the time does not need to be

adjusted.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob or the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12

hour clock or 24 hour clock.

2Customized Features* P. 281

You can turn the clock display on and off.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with navigation system

Models without navigation system

Models with audio touch screen

Models without navigation system

Models with audio touch screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 88 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 89

uuSetting the ClockuClock

Controls

■Using the MENU button

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select CLOCK ADJUST in the

display.

3. Press . CLOCK ADJUST appears.

4. Rotate to select the item you want to

adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).

Then press .

5. Rotate to make the adjustment.

6. Press to enter your selection. The display

returns to CLOCK ADJUST. Repeat steps 4

to 6 to adjust other items.

7. To enter the selection, Rotate and select

SET, then press .

8. Press the MENU button to go back to the

normal display.

1Clock

You can switch the clock display between 24 hours

and 12 hours when in the menu mode.

Selector Knob Icon details

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

To set the time to the nearest hour:

Press and hold the CLOCK button until the clock

display begins to blink, then press the (6 (Reset)

button.

Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets

forward or backward.

Example:

1:06 will reset to 1:00

1:53 will reset to 2:00

Models without audio touch screen

MENU Button

Minute Setting

Hour Setting

12/24 Hour Mode

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 89 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSetting the ClockuClock

Controls

■Using the CLOCK button

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until the

clock display begins to blink.

2. Press the (4 (Hour) button to change the

hours.

3. Press the (5 (Minute) button to change the

minutes.

4. Press the CLOCK button to go back to the

normal display.

CLOCK Button

(6 Button

(4 Button

(5 Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 90 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued

Controls

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key Types and Functions

This vehicle comes with the following keys:

Use the key to start and stop the engine, and

to lock and unlock the doors, tailgate, and

fuel fill door.

You can also use the remote transmitter or

smart entry system* to lock and unlock the

doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door.

The seat automatically moves to the preset

position when you unlock the door using the

remote transmitter or smart entry system.

2Driving Position Memory System* P. 127

■Smart entry remote

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the

doors and tailgate when the smart entry

remote battery becomes weak and the power

door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while

sliding the release knob. To reinstall the built-

in key, push the built-in key into the smart

entry remote until it clicks.

■Master Keys

1Key Types and Functions

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The

immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle

theft.

2Immobilizer System P. 107

The keys contain precision electronics.

Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to

the electronics:

•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in

locations with high temperature or high humidity.

•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

•Keep the keys away from liquids.

•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the

battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine

may not start, and the remote transmitter may not

work.

If the keys do not work properly, have them

inspected by a dealer.

Master Key*Smart Entry

Remote*

Built-in Key

Release Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 91 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

Controls

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and

lock and unlock driver’s door.

Contains a number that you will need if you

purchase a replacement key.

■Valet Key*

1Valet Key*

When you need to leave a key with a third party,

leave the valet key.

Gray

■Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a

safe place outside of your vehicle.

If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a

dealer.

If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,

contact a dealer.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 92 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

Controls

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/

unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.

In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the

engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:

•Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.

•You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications

equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.

•A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*

Communication between the smart entry remote and

the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s

battery.

Battery life is about two years, but this varies

depending on regularity of use.

The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry

remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing

it near electrical appliances such as televisions and

personal computers.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 93 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■Locking the doors

Press the lock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights will flash, all the

doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door will lock,

and the security system sets.

Twice (within five seconds after the first

push):

uA beeper sounds and verifies the security

system is set.

■Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,

the doors will automatically relock.

You can change the relock timer setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

If the interior light switch is in the door activated

position, the interior lights come on when you press

the unlock button.

No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30

seconds.

Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off

immediately.

2Interior Lights P. 142

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so

the operating range may vary depending on the

surroundings.

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is

in the ignition switch.

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote

transmitter or smart entry system only when the

power mode in VEHICLE OFF.

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door or

the tailgate is open.

Models with audio touch screen

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

LED

Unlock Button

Lock Button

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 94 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 95

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

■Unlocking the doors

Press the unlock button.

Once:

uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.

Twice:

uThe remaining doors and tailgate unlock.

1Using the Remote Transmitter

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 507

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with audio touch screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 95 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

When you carry the smart entry remote, you

can lock/unlock the doors, the tailgate, and

the fuel fill door.

You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius

of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door

handle. You can open the tailgate within

about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the

tailgate release button.

■Locking the vehicle

Press the door lock button on the front door

or the tailgate.

uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper

sounds; all the doors, tailgate and fuel fill

door lock; and the security system sets.

■Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

Door Lock Button

Lock

Button

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

•The driver must carry the smart entry remote and

not leave it in the vehicle when you get out.

•A person who is not carrying the smart entry

remote can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate

if a person who is carrying it is within range.

•The door may be unlocked if the door handle is

covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if

the smart entry remote is within range.

•If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the

door sensor may be slow to respond or may not

respond by unlocking the doors.

•You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle

after two seconds of locking it.

•The door might not open if you pull it immediately

after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle

again and confirm that the door is unlocked before

pulling the handle.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is

probably low.

If the LED does not come on when you press a

button, the battery is dead.

2Replacing the Button Battery P. 507

You can customize the door lock mode and keyless

lock acknowledgement setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 96 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 97

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

■Unlocking the vehicle

Grab the driver’s door handle:

uThe driver’s door unlocks.

uSome exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger’s door handle:

uAll the doors and the tailgate unlock.

uSome exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Press the tailgate release button:

uThe trunk unlocks.

2Using the Tailgate Release Button P. 106

Tailgate Release Button

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*

•Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may

not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart

entry remote if it is above or below the outside

handle.

•The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too

close to the door and door glass.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of

unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically

relock.

The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be

customized.

2Customized Features* P. 281

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 97 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Controls

Fully insert the key and turn it.

■Locking the driver’s door

Pull the lock tab rearward a or push the

master door lock switch in the lock direction

b, and close the door.

■Locking the passenger’s doors

Pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.

■Lockout prevention system

The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or

the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key

When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the

other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the

same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door and

fuel fill door unlock first. Turn the key a second time

within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors

and the tailgate.

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with audio touch screen

Lock

Unlock

■Locking a Door Without Using a Key

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key

When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors,

tailgate, and fuel fill door lock at the same time.

Make sure you have the key in your hand before

locking the door to prevent it from being locked in

the vehicle.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 98 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Controls

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■Locking a door

Pull the lock tab rearward.

■Unlocking a door

Push the lock tab forward.

Press the master door lock switch in as shown

to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate.

■Using the Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the

driver’s door, all the other doors, tailgate, and fuel fill

door lock at the same time.

When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the

driver’s door, only the driver’s door and fuel fill door

will unlock.

Unlock

Lock Tab

Lock

■Using the Master Door Lock Switch

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch

When you lock/unlock either front door using the

master door lock switch, all the other doors, tailgate,

and fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time.

To Unlock

Master Door Lock Switch

To Lock

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 99 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

100

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Controls

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside

regardless of the position of the lock tab.

Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock

position, and close the door.

■When opening the door

Open the door using the outside door handle.

■Setting the Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks

To open the door from the inside when the

childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the

unlock position, lower the rear window, put your

hand out of the window, and pull the outside door

handle.

Unlock

Lock

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 100 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

101

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Controls

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a

certain condition is met.

■Drive lock mode

All doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■Park unlock mode

The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal

depressed.

■Auto Door Locking

■Auto Door Unlocking

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the audio/

information screen.

2Customized Features* P. 281

You can turn off or change to another auto door

locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock

switch.

2Customizing the Auto Door Locking/

Unlocking Setting* P. 102

Models with audio/information screen

Models without audio/information screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 101 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

102

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Controls

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■Auto door locking

■Auto door unlocking

*1:Default setting

■List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options

Mode Description

Drive Lock Mode All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reach about 10 mph (15 km/h).*1

Park Lock Mode All doors lock when the shift lever is moved out of (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

Mode Description

Park UnLock Mode

Driver’s door unlocks*1/All doors unlock

When the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Ignition Switch Unlock

Mode

Driver’s door unlocks/All doors unlock

When the ignition switch is moved out of ON (w.

Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 102 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

103

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Continued

Controls

■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options

Steps Drive Lock Mode Park Lock Mode Off

1Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P.

2Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

3The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.

4Move the shift lever out of (P with the

brake pedal depressed. —Pull the lock tab rearward.

Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more

than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.

Press and hold the front of the master

door lock switch on the driver’s door for

more than five seconds. Release the switch

after you hear one click.

6Move the shift lever to (P. —

7Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within five seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 103 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

104

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting*

Controls

■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options

Steps

Ignition Switch Unlock Mode Park Unlock Mode

Off

To unlock driver’s door To unlock all doors To unlock driver’s door To unlock all doors

1Apply the parking brake. Make sure the shift lever is in (P.

2Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

3The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.

4Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal

depressed. —

Press and hold the rear of the master door lock

switch on the driver’s door for more than five

seconds. You will hear a click twice.

Release the switch. Keep pressing the switch

for another five seconds

to hear one more click.

Release the switch. Keep pressing the switch

for another five seconds

to hear one more click.

Release the switch.

7Move the shift lever to (P. —

8Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 within five seconds.

uCustomization is completed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 104 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

105

Controls

Opening and Closing the Tailgate

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or

closing it.

■Opening the tailgate

•Open the tailgate all the way.

uIf it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.

•Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.

■Closing the tailgate

Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:

uAvoid possible damage.

uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 66

1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate

Be careful not to put your hands between the tailgate

and the cargo area when closing the gate.

When you are storing or picking up luggage from the

cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in

front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.

Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They

may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden

acceleration, or a crash.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 105 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

106

uuOpening and Closing the Tailgate uUsing the Tailgate Release Button

Controls

Using the Tailgate Release Button

When all the doors are unlocked, the tailgate

is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button

and lift open the tailgate.

Even if the tailgate is locked, you can open the

tailgate if you carry the smart entry remote.

To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,

pull the tailgate down, and push it closed

from outside.

1Using the Tailgate Release Button

•Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle

when you get out. Carry it with you.

•A person who is not carrying the smart entry

remote can unlock the tailgate if a person who is

carrying it is within range.

•Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the

cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper

sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.

Models with smart entry system

Tailgate Release

Button

Models with smart entry system

Inner Handle

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 106 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

107

Continued

Controls

Security System

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from

starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic

signals to verify the key.

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or

pressing the ENGINE START STOP button:

•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the

ENGINE START STOP button.

•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.

•Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition

switch.

Security System Alarm

The security system alarm activates when the doors, tailgate, or hood are opened

without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

■When the security system alarm activates

The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.

■To deactivate the security system alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry remote, or turn

the ignition switch to ON (w*1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights,

is deactivated.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Immobilizer System

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in

theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.

Always take the ignition key with you whenever you

leave the vehicle unattended.

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.

Doing so may damage the system and make your

vehicle inoperable.

1Security System Alarm

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two

minutes until the security system deactivates.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 107 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

108

Controls

■Setting the security system alarm

The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have

been met:

•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0*1, and the key has been removed from the

ignition switch.

•The hood and tailgate are closed.

•All doors are locked with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

■When the security system alarm sets

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the

blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

■To cancel the security system alarm

The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key,

remote transmitter, or smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON

(w*1. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Security System Alarm

Do not set the security system alarm when someone

is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can

accidentally activate when:

•Unlocking the door with the lock tab or the master

door lock switch.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the

security system alarm, the security alarm may go off

once the battery is recharged or replaced.

If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by

unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add another

device to it.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 108 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

109

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Controls

■The panic button on the remote

transmitter

If you press the panic button for

approximately one second, the following will

occur for about 30 seconds:

•The horn sounds.

•Some exterior lights flash.

■Canceling panic mode

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Panic Mode

Panic Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 109 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

110

Controls

Opening and Closing the Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON

(w*1, using the switches on the doors. The driver side switches can be used to open

and close all of the windows.

The power window lock button on the driver side must be switched off (not pushed

in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the

driver’s seat.

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you

can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on when

children are in the vehicle.

■Automatic operation

To open: Push the switch down firmly.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To

stop the window at any time, push or pull the

switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Push the switch down lightly.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The power windows can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

If a power window senses resistance when closing

automatically, it will stop closing and reverse

direction.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled

when you continuously pull up the switch.

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the

window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

WARNING

Closing a power window on someone’s

hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from

the windows before closing them.

OFF

Power Window

Lock Button

Indicator

Driver’s

Window

Switch

Front Passenger’s

Window Switch

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 110 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

111

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Continued

Controls

To open: Push the switch down.

To close: Pull the switch up.

Release the switch when the window reaches

the desired position.

To open: Press the unlock button twice

within 10 seconds and hold it down for the

second time. If the windows stop midway,

repeat the procedure.

■

Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

Open

■

Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote

Unlock Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 111 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

112

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Controls

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the

key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to

the central position, turn the key in the unlock

direction and hold it there.

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.

Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the

central position, turn the key in the lock

direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows/

moonroof at the desired position. If you want

further adjustment, repeat the same

operation.

■

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key

Open

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 112 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

113

Controls

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1. Use the

switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

■Automatic operation

To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then

release.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then

release.

The moonroof will automatically open or close

all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,

touch the switch briefly.

■Manual operation

To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it

until the desired position is reached.

■Tilting the moonroof up

To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof

switch.

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then

release.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Opening/Closing the Moonroof

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing

temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice

can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10

minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.

Opening either front door cancels this function.

When resistance is detected, the auto reverse

function causes the moonroof to change directions,

then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the

moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully

closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,

are clear of the moonroof.

WARNING

Opening or closing the moonroof on

someone’s hands or fingers can cause

serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of

the moonroof before opening or closing it.

Open

Tilt

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 113 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

114

Controls

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel

Ignition Switch*

1Ignition Switch*

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is

in (P.

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK

(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound

to remind you to take the key out.

If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY

(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left

and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing

the key to turn.

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

position.

(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

(w ON: This is the position when driving.

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.

The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of

the key.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 114 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

115

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*

Continued

Controls

ENGINE START/STOP Button*

■Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

You can start the engine when the smart entry

remote is inside the vehicle.

The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is

close to the door or window, even if it is outside the

vehicle.

ON mode:

Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper

sounds and the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR

START BUTTON message appears on the

information display.

2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

P. 526

Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON

when you get out.

Operating Range

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

Indicator in the button is off.

The steering wheel is locked. The

power to all electrical

components is turned off.

Press the button without the shift lever in (P.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Press the button.

Without pressing the brake pedal

ACCESSORY

Indicator in the button is on.

Indicator in the button blinks

(from ON to ACCESSORY).

Operate the audio system and

other accessories in this position.

Indicator in the button is on.

All electrical components can be

used.

Indicator

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 115 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*

116

Controls

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P and the power

mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.

When in this mode:

The steering wheel does not lock.

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry

system.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

■Automatic Power Off

1ENGINE START/STOP Button*

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE

OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP

button while moving the steering wheel left and

right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the

mode to change.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 116 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

117

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button*

Controls

If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning

beep sounds.

Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/

and outside the vehicle to remind you that the

smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the

buzzer continues even after the remote is put

back inside, place it to be within its

operational range.

■When the power mode is in ON

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,

warning buzzers sound from both inside and

outside the vehicle. A warning message on

the information display notifies the driver

inside that the remote is out.

■When the power mode is in

ACCESSORY

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the

vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a

warning buzzer sounds from outside the

vehicle.

■Power Mode Reminder

■Smart Entry Remote Reminder

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder

When the smart entry remote is within the system’s

operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the

warning function cancels.

If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle

after the engine has been started, you can no longer

change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or

restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is

in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE

START/STOP button.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle

through a window does not activate the warning

buzzer.

Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard

or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer

to go off. Under some other conditions that can

prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the

warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is

within the system’s operational range.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 117 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

118

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Controls

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch

Position

LOCK (0)

(with/without

the key)

ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) START (III)

Without Smart Entry

System

●Engine is turned off and

power is shut down.

●The steering wheel is

locked.

●No electrical

components can be

used.

●Engine is turned off.

●Some electrical

components such as the

audio system and the

accessory power socket

can be operated.

●Normal key position

while driving.

●All electrical components

can be used.

●Use this position to start

the engine.

●The ignition switch

returns to the ON (II)

position when you

release the key.

Power Mode VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK)

ACCESSORY ON START

With Smart Entry

System and ENGINE

START/STOP

Button

Indicator-Off

●Engine is turned off and

power is shut down.

●The steering wheel is

locked.

●No electrical

components can be

used.

Indicator-On or blinking

●Engine is turned off.

●Some electrical

components such as the

audio system and the

accessory power socket

can be operated.

Indicator-

On (engine is turned off)

Off (engine is running)

●All electrical components

can be used.

Indicator-Off

●The mode automatically

returns to ON after the

engine starts.

Indicator is: On Off

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 118 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

119

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Continued

Controls

Turn Signals

The turn signals can be used when the ignition

switch is in ON (w*1.

■One-touch turn signal

When you lightly push up or down and release

the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals

and turn signal indicator blink three times.

This feature can be used when signaling for a

lane change.

Light Switches

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on

and off, regardless of the position of the

ignition switch*1.

■High beams

Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

■Low beams

When in high beams, pull the lever back to

return to low beams.

■Flashing the high beams

Pull the lever back, and release it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Right Turn

Left Turn

■Manual Operation

1Light Switches

If you remove the key from the ignition switch or

leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while

the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened.

When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

2Lights On Indicator P. 79

Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off

because it will cause the battery to discharge.

If you sense that the level of the headlights is

abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

High Beams

Flashing the high beams

Low Beams

Turns on parking, side marker,

tail, and rear license plate lights

Turns on headlights, parking, side

marker, tail, and rear license plate

lights

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 119 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

120

Controls

Automatic lighting control can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the

headlights and other exterior lights will switch

on and off automatically depending on the

ambient brightness.

uYou can change the auto light sensitivity

setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually

when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas

such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.

Do not cover this light sensor with anything;

otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not

work properly.

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:

Setting The exterior lights come on

when the ambient light is at

MAX

HIGH

MID

LOW

MIN

Light Sensor

Models with audio/information screen

Bright

Dark

Models with audio/information screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 120 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

121

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off

within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the driver’s door.

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off

within 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the

remote with you, and close the driver’s door.

uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

2Customized Features* P. 281

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 with the headlight switch on, but do

not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch

is in the AUTO position).

The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock

the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the

driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 121 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

122

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights

Controls

Fog Lights

When the low beam headlights are on, turn

the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Daytime Running Lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following

conditions have been met:

•The ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

•The headlight switch is off, or in .

•The parking brake is released.

The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition

switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running

lights.

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight

switch is turned on.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Fog Lights

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the

instrument panel will be on.

They go off when the headlights turn off, or when

the daytime running lights are on.

2Fog Light Indicator P. 79

Fog Light Switch

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 122 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

123

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Continued

Controls

Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be

used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

■MIST

The wipers run at high speed until you release

the lever.

■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)

Change the wiper switch setting according to

the amount of rain.

■Adjusting the delay

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper

delay.

■Washer

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.

When you release the lever, the wipers make

two or three more sweeps before stopping.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Front Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.

The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber

blades will get damaged.

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the

windshield, becoming stuck.

Operating the wipers in this condition may damage

the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the

windshield, then turn the wipers on.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.

The pump may get damaged.

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are

operating intermittently, the length of the wipe

interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the

wipers make a single sweep.

When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s

shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become

the same.

Intermittent Time

Adjustment Ring

Pull to

use

washer.

MIST

INT: Low speed with

intermittent

OFF

LO: Low speed wipe

HI: High speed wipe

Long delay

Short delay

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 123 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

124

Controls

The rear wiper and washer can be used when

the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

■Wiper switch (OFF, ON)

The wiper operates intermittently after

completing a few sweeps.

■Washer ( )

Sprays while you rotate the switch to this

position.

Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the

washer. Once released, it stops operating

after a few more sweeps.

■Operating in reverse

When you shift the transmission to (R with the front wiper activated, the rear wiper

operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Rear Wiper/Washer

1Rear Wiper/Washer

If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such

as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe

place.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition

switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1, then

remove the obstacle.

The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may

stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an

overload. Wiper operation will return to normal

within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to

normal.

OFF

ON: Continuous wipe

Washer

Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation

INT (Intermittent) Intermittent

LO (Low speed wipe)

HI (High speed wipe) Continuous

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 124 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

125

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Controls

Brightness Control

When the parking lights are turned on and the

ignition switch is in ON (w*1, you can use the

brightness control knob to adjust instrument

panel brightness.

Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

You will hear a beep when the brightness

reaches minimum or maximum. The

information display will return to its original

state several seconds after you adjust the

brightness.

■Brightness level indicator

The brightness level is shown on the

information display while you are adjusting it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Brightness Control

Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on

whether the exterior lights are on or off. The

instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are

on.

Pressing the (Select/Reset) knob switches the

display.

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness

display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels

the reduced instrument panel brightness when the

exterior lights are on.

Control Knob

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 125 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

126

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Controls

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window

and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors

automatically switch off after 20 minutes.

However, if the outside temperature is 18°F

(−8°C) or below, they do not automatically

switch off.

The rear defogger and heated door mirrors

automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes

depending on the outside temperature.

However, if the outside temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or below, they do not automatically

switch off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition

switch.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be

careful not to damage the heating wires.

It is critical to wipe the window from side to side

along the defogger heating wires.

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off

when the window has been defogged.

Also, do not use the system for a long period when

the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,

making it difficult to start the engine.

Models with heating and cooling system

Models with audio

touch screen

Models with climate control system

Models without

audio touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 126 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

127

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

Continued

Controls

Driving Position Memory System*

You can store two driver’s seat and door mirror positions with the driving position

memory system.

When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat and door

mirrors adjust automatically to one of the two preset positions.

Select either remote you use to unlock the vehicle when you enter.

•DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.

•DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.

1Driving Position Memory System*

Using the audio/information screen, you can disable

the automatic seat adjustment function.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with audio/information screen

DRIVER 1 DRIVER 2

Models with smart entry system

Models without smart entry system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 127 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System*

128

Controls

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1. Adjust

the driver’s seat and the door mirrors to the

desired position.

2. Press the SET button.

uYou will hear a beep, and the memory

button indicator light will blink.

3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2

within five seconds of pressing the SET

button.

uOnce the seat and the door mirrors

position has been memorized, the

indicator light on the button you pressed

stays on.

1. Move the shift lever to (P.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Press a memory button ((1 or (2).

uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator

light will blink.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Storing a Position in Memory

1Storing a Position in Memory

After you press the SET button, the storing operation

will be canceled when:

•You do not press the memory button within five

seconds.

•You readjust the seat position before the double-

beep.

•You readjust the door mirrors.

•You turn the ignition switch to any position except

ON (w*1.

Memory

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

SET Button

■Recalling the Stored Position

1Recalling the Stored Position

The seat and the door mirrors automatically move to

the memorized position. When they finish moving,

the beeper sounds, and the indicator light stays on.

The seat and the door mirrors stop moving if you:

•Press the SET button, or a memory button ((1 or

(2).

•Adjust the seat position.

•Adjust the door mirrors.

•Shift into any position except (P.

Memory

Button 1

Memory

Button 2

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 128 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

129

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

1. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever

down.

uThe steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

uMake sure you can see the instrument

panel gauges and indicators.

3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position.

uAfter adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you

start driving.

WARNING

Adjusting the steering wheel position while

driving may cause you to lose control of the

vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the

vehicle is stopped.

To adjust

To lock Lever

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 129 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

130

Controls

Adjusting the Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror

Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving

position.

When driving after dark, the automatic

dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare

from headlights behind you.

■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

1Adjusting the Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and

adjusted for best visibility.

Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

2Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 133

Indicator Sensor

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

The auto dimming function cancels when the shift

position is in (R.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 130 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

131

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Continued

Controls

Power Door Mirrors

You can adjust the door mirrors when the

ignition switch is in ON (w*1.

■Mirror position adjustment

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right

mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the

switch to the center position.

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press

the switch left, right, up, or down to move the

mirror.

If activated, either side door mirror

automatically tilts downward when you put

the shift lever in (R; this improves close-in

visibility on the selected side of the vehicle

when reversing. The mirror automatically

returns to its original position when you shift

out of (R.

To activate this feature, turn the ignition

switch to ON (w*1, and slide the selector

switch to the left or right side.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Selector

Switch

Adjustment Switch

■Reverse Tilt Door Mirror*

Selector Switch

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 131 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

132

Controls

The driver side door mirror has outer and inner

segments.

The outer segment is slightly curved to provide

a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.

This wider view may help you check areas that

are not visible using a standard door mirror.

■Expanded View Driver’s Mirror

Inner Segment

Outer Segment

1Expanded View Driver’s Mirror

Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side

door mirror appears smaller than objects in the rest of

the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they

appear.

Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side

and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 132 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

133

Continued

Controls

Adjusting the Seats

Adjusting the Seat Positions

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible

while allowing you to maintain full control of

the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,

well back in the seat and be able to

adequately press the pedals without leaning

forward, and grip the steering wheel

comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be

adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far

back from the front airbag in the dashboard

as possible.

■Adjusting the front power seat(s)*

1Adjusting the Seats

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow

at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and the chest.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

WARNING

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result

in serious injury or death if the front

airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front

airbags as possible while maintaining

control of the vehicle.

Move back.

Allow sufficient

space.

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Height Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only) Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Lumbar Support Adjustment

(Driver’s seat only)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 133 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

134

Controls

■Adjusting the front manual seat*

1Adjusting the front manual seat*

Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and

forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position Adjustment

Pull up on the bar to move the seat,

then release the bar.

Seat-back Angle

Adjustment

Pull up the lever to

change the angle.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 134 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 135

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,

upright position, leaving ample space

between your chest and the airbag cover in

the center of the steering wheel.

The front seat passenger should also adjust

their seat-back to a comfortable, upright

position.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the

occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the

chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a

seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

■Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the

seat-back and your back.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag

operation.

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering

wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend

that you investigate whether some type of adaptive

equipment may help.

WARNING

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in

serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,

and sit well back in the seat.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 135 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

136

Controls

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints

in all seating positions.

Head restraints are most effective for

protection against whiplash and other rear-

impact crash injuries when the center of the

back of the occupant’s head rests against the

center of the restraint. The tops of the

occupant’s ears should be level with the

center height of the restraint.

■Adjusting the front head restraint positions

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint: Push it down

while pressing the release button.

■Adjusting the Head Restraints

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have active

head restraints.

2Active Head Restraints P. 138

WARNING

Improperly positioning head restraints

reduces their effectiveness and increases

the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and

positioned properly before driving.

Position head in the center

of the head restraint.

Release

Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 136 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 137

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

Controls

A passenger sitting in a back seating position

should adjust the height of their head restraint

to an appropriate position before the vehicle

begins moving.

To raise the head restraint:

Pull it upward.

To lower the head restraint:

Push it down while pressing the release

button.

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.

To remove the head restraint:

Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the

restraint up and out.

To reinstall the head restraint:

Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height

while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked

in position.

■Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions

Release

Button

■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

WARNING

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the

head restraints can result in severe injury

during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before

driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 137 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

138

Controls

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their

seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their

seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is

off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if

an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or

sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly

increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or

fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an

inflating front airbag.

The driver’s and front passenger’s seats have

active head restraints. In a rear impact, an

occupant properly secured by a seat belt will

be pushed against the seat-back and the head

restraint will move forward. This reduces the

distance between the restraint and the

occupant’s head, which helps reduce the

likelihood of whiplash and injuries to the neck

and upper spine.

■Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

■Active Head Restraints

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

WARNING

Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat,

with your feet on the floor.

1Active Head Restraints

In order for the active head restraints to operate

properly:

•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or

from the restraint legs.

•Do not place any objects between an occupant and

the seat-back.

•Install each restraint in its proper location.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return

to its normal position. If the restraint does not return

to its normal position, or in the event of a severe

collision, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 138 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

139

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Continued

Controls

Rear Seats

Separately fold down the left and right halves of the rear seat to make room for

cargo.

■To fold down the seat

1. Lower the rear head restraint to its lowest position. Put the armrest back into the

seat-back.

2. Pull the release lever.

If the rear head restraints get caught on the

front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.

2Removing and Reinstalling the Head

Restraints P. 137

■Folding Down the Rear Seats

1Folding Down the Rear Seats

Remove any items from the rear seat cushion before

you fold down the rear seat.

When you fold down one side of the rear seats and

use the non-recessed part of the cargo area, make

sure to secure the cargo. Loose items can fly forward

and cause injury if you have to brake hard.

Make sure all items in the cargo area or items

extending to the rear seats are properly

secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have

to brake hard.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press

against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the

weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work

improperly.

2Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 51

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they

do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold

down.

Pull

Release

Lever

From the rear door side

Lever

From the cargo area side

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 139 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

140

Controls

■To return the seat to the original position

Pull up the seat-back in the upright position.

1To return the seat to the original position

Make sure the seat is latched before driving.

You see the red indicator behind the release lever

when the seat-back is latched fully.

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until

it locks.

When returning a seat-back to its original position,

push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder

belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the

center shoulder belt is positioned in the guide.

Red Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 140 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

141

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Controls

Armrest

The console lid can be used as an armrest.

Slide the armrest to one of its three positions.

Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.

■Using the Front Seat Armrest

■Using the Rear Seat Armrest

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 141 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

142

Controls

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

■ON

The interior lights come on regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Door activated

The interior lights come on in the following

situations:

•When any of the doors are opened.

•You unlock the driver’s door.

•You remove the key from the ignition

switch.

•When the power mode is set to VEHICLE

OFF (LOCK).

Only the cargo area light comes on when the

tailgate is opened.

■OFF

The interior lights remain off regardless of

whether the doors are open or closed.

■Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade

out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are

closed.

The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following

situations:

•When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.

•When you remove the key from the ignition switch

but do not open a door.

•When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) but do not open a door.

You can change the interior lights dimming time.

2Customized Features* P. 281

The interior lights go off immediately in the following

situations:

•When you lock the driver’s door.

•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

•When you close the driver’s door with the key in

the ignition switch.

•When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY

mode.

If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF

(LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition switch,

the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE

START/STOP

button instead of an ignition switch.

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

Door Activated Position

Off

Front

Door Activated Position

Off

Rear

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 142 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

143

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Controls

The map lights can be turned on and off by

pressing the lenses.

■ON

The light comes on when you open the

tailgate, and goes off when closed.

■OFF

The light stays off with or without opening the

tailgate.

■Map Lights

1Map Lights

When the interior light switch is in the door activated

position and any door is open, the map light will not

go off when you press the lens.

■Cargo Area Lights

Off

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 143 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

144

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

Interior Convenience Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box. You

can lock the glove box with the master key or

the built-in key.

■Glove Box

1Glove Box

WARNING

An open glove box can cause serious injury

to your passenger in a crash, even if the

passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while

driving.

Glove Box

To Lock

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 144 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

145

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

Pull the handle to open the console

compartment.

■Removable tray

The tray in the console compartment is

detachable.

To remove this tray, slide it forward, then pull

it up.

■Console Compartment

Removable Tray

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 145 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

146

Controls

■Front seat beverage holders

■Rear seat beverage holders

Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat

beverage holders.

■Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders

NOTICE

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,

and electrical components in the interior.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.

Hot liquid can scald you.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 146 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 147

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY

(q or ON (w*1.

■Accessory power socket (console panel)

Open the cover to use it.

■Accessory power socket (console

compartment)

Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter

element.

This can overheat the power socket.

The accessory power socket is designed to supply

power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120

watts or less (10 amps).

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket

with the engine running.

When each sockets is being used simultaneously, the

combined power rating of the accessories should not

exceed 120 watts (10 amps).

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 147 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

148

Controls

■Accessory power socket (cargo area)

Open the cover to use it.

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab

handle. Pull it down to use it.

■Coat Hook

1Coat Hook

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy

items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 148 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 149

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

Use floor cargo hooks to secure luggage in the

cargo area.

There are also hooks on both sides of the

cargo area.

■Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

Each hook is designed to hold up to 56.2 lbs (25.5 kg)

of weight.

Hooks

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 149 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

150

Controls

Pull the handle to open the cargo floor lid.

The reverse side of the cargo floor lid is water-

proofed. Flip the lid to use the water-proofed

side.

■To keep the lid open:

1. Remove the hook from the back of the

cargo floor lid.

2. Pull the hook to the hole on the side panel.

■Removable box

The removable box is under the cargo floor.

To remove the box, lift it up with the straps on

both sides.

■Under-floor Storage Area

1Under-floor Storage Area

NOTICE

Do not put objects that weigh more than 22.1 lbs (10

kg) in the removable box. Exceeding the maximum

load may damage the box.

Do not leave water, soil, sand, or perishable foods in

the removable box. Rotting food and dirt on the floor

may cause the breakdown of electrical equipment.

Strap

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 150 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

151

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Continued

Controls

Pull the strap to raise the lid.

The reverse side of each lid is water-proofed.

Flip the lids, then replace each other side.

■Side Storage Compartments

Strap

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 151 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

152

Controls

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release the indent. To close, push it again until

it latches.

You can store eyeglasses and other small

items in this holder.

Pull the lid to open the pocket.

■Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

Keep the holder closed while driving except when

accessing stored items.

Push

■Center Pocket(s)*

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 152 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

153

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Controls

The ignition switch must be in ON (w*1 to use

the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats

faster than the LO setting.

There is no heater in the passenger’s seat-

back due to the side airbag cutoff system.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.

uThe appropriate indicator will be on

while the seat heater is on. Briefly press

the switch on the opposite side to turn

the heater off. The indicator will be off.

When a comfortable temperature is

reached, select LO to keep the seat

warm.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Seat Heaters*

1Seat Heaters*

Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the

engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may

be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and

does not automatically turn off.

WARNING

Heat induced burns are possible when

using seat heaters.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense

temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,

lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or

with sensitive skin should not use seat

heaters.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 153 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

154

Controls

Heating and Cooling System*

Using Vents, Heating and A/C

Mode Buttons

Change airflow.

Floor and defroster vents

Floor vents

Dashboard, floor and back of the center console vents

Dashboard and back of the center console vents

Fan Control Dial

Adjusts the fan speed.

Rotate the dial all the

way to OFF to turn

everything off.

Button

Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from the

dashboard and back of the center console vents,

and switches the mode to recirculation.

A/C Button

Press to cool the interior or

dehumidify while heating.

Windshield Defroster Button

Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from

the defroster vents at the base of the

windshield, and switches the mode to

fresh air.

Temperature

Control Dial

Adjusts the interior

temperature.

(Recirculation) Button

Press the button and switch the mode

depending on environmental conditions.

Recirculation Mode (indicator on):

Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through

the system.

Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):

Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 154 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 155

uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

Controls

The heater uses heat from the engine coolant

to warm the air.

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control

dial.

2. Select .

3. Adjust the temperature using the

temperature control dial.

■To rapidly warm up the interior

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Select .

3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.

4. Press the button (the indicator on).

■To dehumidify the interior

When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the

interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial.

2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.

3. Select .

4. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial.

■Heating

1Heating

When you select , the mode automatically

switches to fresh air.

1To rapidly warm up the interior

Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets

warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in

recirculation mode.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 155 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C

156

Controls

1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control

dial.

2. Select .

3. Adjust the temperature using the

temperature control dial.

4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).

■To rapidly cool down the interior

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.

3. Press the button (the indicator on).

Pressing the button turns the air

conditioning system on and automatically

switches the system to fresh air mode.

■To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.

2. Press the button.

3. Press the button (the indicator on).

4. Set the temperature to maximum heat.

■Cooling

1To rapidly cool down the interior

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

more rapidly by partially opening the windows.

■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower

limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the

windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

the air hits the side windows.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air

mode.

If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the

windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes

visibility.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 156 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

157

Continued

Controls

Climate Control System*

Using Automatic Climate Control

The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or

cooled air that will as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

Floor and

defroster vents

Floor ventsDashboard, floor

and back of the

center console vents

Dashboard and

back of the center

console vents

AUTO Button

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

/ (Fan Control)

Buttons

(Recirculation)

Button

A/C (Air Conditioning)

Button

Models without audio/information screen

Floor and

defroster vents

Floor ventsDashboard, floor

and back of the

center console vents

Dashboard and

back of the center

console vents

AUTO

Button

Driver’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

(Recirculation)

Button

/ (Fan Control)

Buttons

A/C (Air Conditioning)

Button

Passenger’s Side

Temperature

Control Switch

Models with audio/information screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 157 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

158

Controls

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control

switch.

3. Press the (On/Off) button to cancel.

■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the (recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on

environmental conditions.

Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through

the system.

Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control

If any buttons are pressed while using the climate

control system in auto, the function of the button

that was pressed will take priority.

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions

unrelated to the button that was pressed will be

controlled automatically.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the

fan may not start immediately when the AUTO

button is pressed.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down

more rapidly by partially opening the windows,

turning the system on auto, and setting the

temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to

recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper

limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

Pressing the button switches the climate

control system between on and off. When turned on,

the system returns to your last selection.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 158 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 159

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

Controls

Pressing the button turns the air

conditioning system on and automatically

switches the system to fresh air mode.

Pressing the button again to turn off, the

system returns to the previous settings.

■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view

through all the windows before driving.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower

limit.

When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the

windshield may fog up.

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that

the air hits the side windows.

Models without audio/

information screen

Models with audio/

information screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 159 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control

160

Controls

■To rapidly defrost the windows

1. Press the button.

2. Press the button.

Models without audio/

information screen

Models with audio/

information screen

1To rapidly defrost the windows

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air

mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,

the windows may fog up from humidity. This

impedes visibility.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 160 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

161

uuClimate Control System*uSynchronized Mode

Controls

Synchronized Mode

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger

side in synchronized mode.

1. Press the SYNC button.

uThe system will switch to synchronized mode.

2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control switch.

Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

1Synchronized Mode

When you press the button, the system changes

to synchronized mode.

When the system is in dual mode, the driver side

temperature and the passenger side temperature can

be set separately.

The system adjusts each temperature based on the

information of the sunlight sensor and the sun

position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.

Models with navigation system

Models without audio/

information screen

Models with audio/

information screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 161 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

162

uuClimate Control System*uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Controls

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

The automatic climate control system is

equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill

any liquid on them.

Sensor

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 162 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

163

Features

This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System

About Your Audio System................ 164

USB Adapter Cable .......................... 165

Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 165

Audio System Theft Protection ......... 166

Region Setting*............................... 167

Audio Remote Controls.................... 168

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 169

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 182

Models without navigation system

Audio system without touch screen

Audio system with touch screen

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 215

Audio Error Messages ...................... 268

General Information on the Audio

System ............................................. 276

Customized Features*...................... 281

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*.. 318

Bluetooth

HandsFreeLink

....320, 332, 367

Compass*.................................. 405, 407

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 163 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

164

Features

Audio System

About Your Audio System

The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC

files, iPod®, and USB flash drives.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or

the remote controls on the steering wheel.

The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service*. It can also play

audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio*, USB flash drives,

and iPod®, iPhone® and Bluetooth® devices.

You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the

icons on the touchscreen interface, or the remote controls on the steering wheel.

See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.

1About Your Audio System

XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.

For more information on XM® Radio, contact a

dealer.

2General Information on the Audio System

P. 276

XM® Radio is available in the United States and

Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not

supported.

iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned

by Apple Inc.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Audio system without touch screen

Audio system with touch screen

Remote Control

iPod®

USB Flash

Drive

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 164 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

165

uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable

Features

USB Adapter Cable

1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the

adapter cable.

2. Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB

flash drive to the USB connector.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.

1. Open the AUX cover.

2. Connect a standard audio device to the

input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo

miniplug.

uThe audio system automatically switches

to the AUX mode.

1USB Adapter Cable

•Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may

damage it.

•Do not use an extension cable with the USB

adapter cable.

•Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a

hub.

•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard

disk drive, as the device or your files may be

damaged.

•We recommend backing up your data before using

the device in your vehicle.

•Displayed messages may vary depending on the

device model and software version.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try

reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To

reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions

provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/

ipod.

1Auxiliary Input Jack

To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode

buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by

pressing the AUX button.

You can return to the AUX mode by selecting

Change Source on the Audio menu screen or

Source on the touch screen.

You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace

the audio system.

Audio system without touch screen

Audio system with touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 165 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

166

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Features

Audio System Theft Protection

The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as

when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.

■Reactivating the audio system

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w, and turn on the audio system.

uIf you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q, you will be requested to

enter the audio security code.

2. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, and turn on the audio system.

uIf you turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q*1, you will be requested to

enter the audio security code. See step 3.

2. Press and hold the VOL/ (power/volume) button again for more than two

seconds.

uThe audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that

the system is in your vehicle.

If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter code/Enter PIN Code appears on

the audio/information screen.

3. Enter the audio security code using the touch screen.

If you enter an incorrect digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not

enter the code correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying

again, or visit a dealer to have the system reset.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Audio System Theft Protection

Find the audio system’s security code and serial

number label in your owner’s manual kit.

We recommend that you write down the serial

number in this owner’s manual.

Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the

label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and

then obtain the code.

You can find out about your serial number and

security code from a dealer.

You can register the security code at Honda Owners

(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how

to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at

radio-navicode.honda.com.

U.S. models

Audio system without touch screen

Audio system with touch screen

All models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 166 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

167

uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting*

Features

Region Setting*

The audio system’s region setting will be lost when the battery is disconnected or

goes dead.

If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio

system. Follow the steps below:

1. Press to select OK.

2. Rotate to select the region you live in, then press .

3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

1Region Setting*

The region setting is required only when the battery

power is temporarily disconnected. It is set to your

vehicle’s region type by the factory.

You cannot change the setting once you have

completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if

you selected an incorrect region.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 167 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

168

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

Audio Remote Controls

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.

SOURCE Button

Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FM AM XM* CD HDD* USB

iPod® Bluetooth® Audio* Pandora®*

AhaTM* AUX

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons

Press (+: Increases the volume.

Press (-: Decreases the volume.

Buttons

•When listening to the radio

Press : Selects the next preset radio station.

Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.

Press and hold : Selects the next strong station.

Press and hold : Selects the previous strong station.

•When listening to a CD, HDD*, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio*

Press : Skips to the next song.

Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.

•When listening to a CD, HDD* or USB flash drive

Press and hold : Skips to the next folder.

Press and hold : Goes back to the previous folder.

•When listening to Pandora®*

Press : Skips to the next song.

Press and hold : Selects the next station.

Press and hold : Selects the previous station.

1Audio Remote Controls

The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.

When in the AUX mode, the following is operable

from the remote controls:

•iPod®/USB flash drive connected to the USB

adapter cable

Audio system without touch screen

Button

SOURCE Button

Button

(+ Button

(- Button

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 168 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

169

Features

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w.

Use the selector knob or MENU button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions. The

extended display has three segments to

display detailed information.

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection.

MENU button: Press to select any setting

such as the clock, sound control, or the

compass*. Press this button again to cancel

the menu display mode.

RETURN button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

Audio system without touch screen

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Press the SOURCE, (+, (-, or button on the

steering wheel to change any audio setting.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

RETURN

Button

Selector

Knob

Button

Menu Display

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 169 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

170

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

Press the MENU button, and rotate to

adjust the setting, then press . Rotate to

scroll through the following choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

When the adjustment level reaches the center, you

will see C in the display.

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and

HIGH.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Selector

Knob

Button

RETURN

Button

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

SUBW

SVC

CLOCK ADJUST

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Subwoofer

Clock setting

FADER is selectable.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 170 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

171

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Continued

Features

Playing the AM/FM Radio

AM Button

FM Button

Press to select a band.

SCAN Button

Press to sample each of the

strongest stations on the

selected band for 10 seconds.

To turn off scan, press the

button again.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Preset Buttons (1-6)

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Pick a preset button and hold it

until you hear a beep.

To listen to a stored station, select a

band, then press the preset button.

Selector Knob

Turn to tune the radio frequency.

TITLE Button

Press to switch the RDS name

on and off.

FOLDER Bar

Press either side to display and

select an RDS category.

SKIP Bar

Press and hold to search up and

down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

A.SEL (Auto Select) Button

Press to scan both bands and store

the strongest station in each preset.

To turn off auto select, press the

button again. This restores the

presets you originally set.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 171 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

172

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■RDS INFO ON

Press the TITLE button while listening to an RDS capable station. RDS INFO ON

appears, and the station name is displayed.

■To find an RDS station from your selected program category

1. Press the FOLDER bar to display and select

an RDS category.

2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

You can store six AM stations and twelve FM stations

into the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you

store six stations each.

Auto Select function scans and stores up to six AM

stations and twelve FM stations with a strong signal

into the preset button memory.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,

you can manually store your preferred frequencies.

RDS Category

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 172 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

173

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Continued

Features

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA

format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.

LOAD Button

Press to load a CD.

Press until you hear a beep and see

LOAD in the display to load CDs.

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of each song.

●Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in

the current folder in MP3 or WMA).

●Press two times to sample the first file in each

of the main folders (MP3 or WMA).

●Press three times to sample the first track on

each CD (the first file in the main folder on

each disc in MP3 or WMA).

●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change tracks

(files in MP3 or WMA).

CD Button

Press to play a CD.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

FOLDER Bar

Press to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder in MP3 or WMA.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data on a CD

(if it was recorded with text data).

MENU Button

Press to display menu items

(if available).

Selector Knob

Turn to change tracks/files. Turn

to select an item, then press to set

your selection.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 173 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

174

Features

1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

(MP3/WMA)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays UNSUPPORTED, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

The display shows up to 31 characters of text data.

Press and hold the TITLE button to see additional

characters. indicates that the text data continues.

The display goes back to the previous screen if you

press and hold the button again.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

Folder Selection

Track Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 174 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

175

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or files.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .

3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Press the RETURN button to go back to the previous

display, and press the MENU button to cancel this

setting mode.

Play Mode Menu Items

NORMAL PLAY

REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track/file.

REPEAT ONE FLD (MP3/WMA): Repeats all files in

the current folder.

REPEAT DISC: Repeats the current CD.

RANDOM IN FLD (MP3/WMA): Plays all files in the

current folder in random order.

RANDOM IN DISC: Plays all tracks/files in the current

CD in random order.

SCAN TRK (MP3/WMA): Samples all tracks on the

CD. Samples all files in the current folder.

SCAN FLD (MP3/WMA): Samples the first file in

each folder on the CD.

SCAN DISC: Samples the first track/file on each CD.

Play Mode

Items

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 175 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

176

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press

the AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change songs.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a song, file, menu

item, or play mode. Press to set

your selection.

AUX Button

Press to select iPod® (if connected).

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

MENU Button

Press to display menu items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 176 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 177

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

1. Press to display the iPod® menu.

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a File from the iPod® Menu

1Playing an iPod®

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio display.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

iPod® Menu:

Playlists, Artists,

Albums, and Songs

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 177 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

178

Features

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .

3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

NORMAL PLAY

SHUFFLE OFF: Turns off the shuffle mode.

SHUFFLE ALL: Plays all available files in a selected list

(playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order.

SHUFFLE ALBUM: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, or songs) in

random order.

REPEAT OFF: Turns off the repeat mode.

REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current track.

Play Mode Items

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 178 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

179

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this audio unit.

SCAN Button

You will get a 10-second sampling of each file.

●Press to sample all files in the current folder.

●Press two times to sample the first file in

each of the main folders.

●To turn off scan, press and hold the button.

RETURN Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Turn to select a file, then press to

set your selection.

AUX Button

Press to select USB flash drive

(if connected).

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

SKIP Bar

Press or to change files.

MENU Button

Press to display menu items.

TITLE Button

Press to display the text data.

FOLDER Bar

Press to skip to the next

folder, and to skip to the

beginning of the previous

folder.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 179 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

180

Features

1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2USB Flash Drives P. 280

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and

then skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio display.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Folder Selection

Track Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 180 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

181

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select PLAY MODE, then press .

3. Rotate to select NORMAL PLAY, then press .

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

NORMAL PLAY

REPEAT ONE TRACK: Repeats the current file.

REPEAT ONE FLD: Repeats all files in the current

folder.

RANDOM IN FLD: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

RANDOM ALL: Plays all files in random order.

SCAN TRK: Samples all files in the current folder.

SCAN FLD: Samples the first file in each folder.

Play Mode Items

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 181 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

182

Features

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w*1.

Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK

buttons to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

MENU/SEL (Selector) knob: Rotate left or

right to scroll through the available choices.

Press to set your selection.

Also press to select any mode. The available

mode includes Change Source, Station List,

Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and

play modes. Play modes can be also selected

from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on.

BACK button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness.

Press once and make an adjustment.

uEach time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and OFF mode.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Models with two displays

1Audio System Basic Operation

These indications are used to show how to operate

the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Audio Menu Items

2Station List P. 195

2Save Preset P. 194, 199

2Radio text P. 196

2Music Search P. 201, 205, 211

2Scan P. 202, 212

2Random/Repeat P. 202, 206, 212

Button

MENU/SEL

(Selector) Knob

DISP (SETTINGS) Button

BACK Button

VOL/ Knob

Press to turn the audio

system on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 182 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

183

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Continued

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Select More to display the menu items.

■Selecting an Audio Source

1Audio with Touch Screen

Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source

selected.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Use the / / / icons to turn the page.

■Displaying the Menu Items

Select Source.

Source List Icons

Select More.Menu Items

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 183 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

184

Features

Select to adjust the clock and screen settings.

■Changing the Clock settings

2Setting the Clock P. 88

■Changing the Screen settings

1. Select Screen Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

■Changing the Clock/Screen Settings

1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings

The followings are adjustable screen settings:

•Brightness

•Contrast

•Black Level

•Display

Changes between the daytime or nighttime

modes.

•Beep

Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the

screen.

•Fade Timer

Sets the screen black out timing.

Select .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 184 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

185

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Features

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

■Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 191

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 185 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

186

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

■Switching the Display

Using the button

(Display) Button Audio

Trip Computer

(Current Drive)

Clock/Wallpaper Trip Computer

(History of Trip A)

Audio/Information Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 186 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

187

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

Features

Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.

Rotate to select Audio, Phone, Info or Settings and press .

■Audio

Shows the current audio information.

■Phone

Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 332

■Settings

Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features* P. 281

Using the DISP button

Function Change Screen

DISP Button

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 187 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

188

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■Info

Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.

Press , rotate to select an item, then press .

Info menu items

Current Drive (Trip computer)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

History of Trip A (Trip computer)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,

as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three

driving cycles.

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

Delete History

1. Rotate to select Delete History, then press .

2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

Clock/Wallpaper

Shows the current clock type and wallpaper

Clock/Wallpaper Change

Enters the clock and wallpaper setting menu screen.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 188 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 189

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■Import wallpaper

You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash

drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

adapter cable.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

2. Press the DISP button to go to the

Function change screen.

3. Rotate to select Info, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/

Wallpaper Change, Clock/Wallpaper

Type, then Wallpaper.

4. Rotate to select Add New, then press .

uThe picture name is displayed on the list.

5. Rotate to select a desired picture.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen.

6. Press to save the data.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the

wallpaper list.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The individual file size limit is 2 MB.

•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the

image is displayed in the middle of the screen with

the extra area appearing in black.

•Up to 255 files can be selected.

•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

You can also enter the wallpaper setup menu screen

to select Settings, Info Settings, then Clock/

Wallpaper Type.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 189 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

190

Features

■Select wallpaper

1. Press the DISP button to go to the Function change screen.

2. Rotate to select Info, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper change, Clock/Wallpaper

Type, then Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

4. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Set, then press .

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

■Delete wallpaper

1. Press the DISP button to go to the Function change screen.

2. Rotate to select Info, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper change, Clock/Wallpaper

Type, then Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

3. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

4. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

6. Rotate to select OK, then press to delete completely.

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview

and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select

OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 190 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

191

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Settings, then press

3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

4. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

DISP (SETTINGS) Button

BACK Button

MENU/SEL

(Selector) Knob

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer

SVC

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 191 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

192

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Features

Display Setup

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the DISP button to go to the Settings

screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Display.

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press

4. Rotate to adjust the setting.

1. Press the DISP button to go to the Settings

screen.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Others.

3. Rotate to select Background Color,

then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want,

then press .

■Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 192 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

193

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Continued

Features

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Tune Up/Down Icons

Select or to tune the radio

frequency.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Source

Select to change a band or change

an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to search up and

down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

Select to display the menu items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 193 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

194

Features

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

You can also switch the mode by pressing and

selecting Change Source on the Audio menu

screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset memory.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 194 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 195

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select the station, then press .

■Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select UPDATE LIST, then press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 195 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

196

Features

■Radio text

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

■Scan

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Radio text

The text indicator comes on when you received a text

message. The indicator stays on until you read the

message.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 196 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

197

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio*

Continued

Features

Playing XM® Radio*

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Category Up/Down Icons

Select or to display and

select an XM® Radio category.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-12.

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to the previous

or next channel.

In channel mode, select and hold

to change the channel rapidly.

Select to display the menu items.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 197 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio*

198

Features

1. Select the XM® mode.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

2Audio with Touch Screen P. 183

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press .

4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .

5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press .

6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .

2. Select More.

3. Select Tune Mode.

4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.

5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or the

preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

■To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio*

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This

does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 198 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

199

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio*

Features

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio*

You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset

memory.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 199 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

200

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or

AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track/file.

Select to display the menu items.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder, and

to skip to the beginning of the

previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 200 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 201

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

Folder Selection

File Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 201 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

202

Features

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second

sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,

WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in

the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Random/Repeat

is selected.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Random/Repeat

is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 202 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

203

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Continued

Features

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then select

the iPod mode.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

Selector Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Album Art Icon

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Album Bar

Select to search for an album.

Album Art

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 203 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

204

Features

1. Select the album bar.

uThe image of the current album is displayed.

2. Select or icon to search for an album.

uWhen the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

■How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album

You cannot select an album while the vehicle is

moving.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album

image.

Select the

album bar.

Album Bar Album Image

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 204 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 205

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a menu.

3. Press to display the items on that menu.

4. Rotate to select an item, then press .

■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Folder Selection

File Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 205 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

206

Features

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 206 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

207

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Continued

Features

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora

is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when a phone is

connected.

Rating Icon

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Station Up/Down Icons

Select to change a station.

Source

Select Pandora® or AhaTM.

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a song.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a song.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 207 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

208

Features

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio

system. The available items are:

•Like

•Dislike

•Station List

•Change Source

•Bookmark Track

•Bookmark Artist

•Play/Pause

■Operating a menu item

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select an item and press .

■Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that

selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user

enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

must first be installed on your phone. Visit

www.pandora.com. for more information.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio

system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®

Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio

system is selected.

1Pandora® Menu

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Pandora®* P. 273

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 208 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

209

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Features

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.

The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select an item and press .

■AhaTM Menu

•Like •15sec Back

•Play/Pause •30sec Skip

•Stations •View text

•Change Source •View list

•Dislike

1AhaTM Menu

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that

organizes your favorite web content into live radio

stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,

location-based services, and audio updates from

social media sites.

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2AhaTM* P. 275

The menu items vary depending on the station you

selected.

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app

must be installed on your phone. Visit

owners.honda.com/apps for more information.

You must have a previously set up Aha account prior

to using the service in your vehicle. Visit

www.aharadio.com for more information.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 209 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

210

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then select the USB mode.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a file.

Select to display the menu items.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive

is connected.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder,

and to skip to the beginning of

the previous folder.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 210 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 211

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

1. Press . Rotate to select Music

Search, then press .

2. Rotate to select a folder.

3. Press to change the display to a list of

files in that folder.

4. Rotate to select a file, then press .

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2USB Flash Drives P. 280

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then

skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Folder Selection

File Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 211 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

212

Features

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu

screen.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files

in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat is selected.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Random/Repeat is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 212 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

213

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Continued

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 339

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or

to change files.

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected to

HFL.

VOL/

(Volume/Power)

Knob

Press to turn the

audio system on

and off.

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Audio/

Information

Screen

Audio with

Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to

the previous

display.

Select to display

the menu items.

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

Press and turn to select an

item, then press to set your

selection.

Source

Select to change

an audio source.

Folder Up/Down

Icons

Select or to

change folder.

Play Icon

Pause Icon

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 213 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

214

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

connected.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press to switch to the Audio menu screen.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

Select the play icon or pause icon.

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 332

Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

MENU/SEL (Selector) knob

Audio with Touch Screen

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 214 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

215

Features

Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or

ON (w*1.

Use the interface dial or MENU button to

access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and

extended display for some functions.

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll

through the available choices. Press to set

your selection. Move right, left, up or down to

select secondary menu.

MENU button: Press to select any mode. The

available mode includes Change Source,

Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,

Music Search, and play modes. Play modes

can be also selected from Scan, Random/

Repeat, and so on.

BACK button: Press to go back to the

previous display.

button: Press to change the audio/

information screen brightness.

Press once and make an adjustment.

uEach time you press , the mode

switches between the daytime mode,

nighttime mode and off mode.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

Voice Control System

The audio system is voice operable. See the

navigation system manual for details.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the interface dial.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Move , , or to select secondary menu.

Audio Menu Items

2Station List P. 234

2Save Preset P. 233, 238

2Radio text P. 235

2Music Search P. 240, 244, 254, 264

2Scan P. 241, 245, 265

2Random/Repeat P. 241, 245, 255, 265

Interface Dial

MENU ButtonBACK Button

Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 215 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

216

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Select More to display the menu items.

■Selecting an Audio Source

1Audio with Touch Screen

Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source

selected.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Use the / / / icons to turn the page.

■Displaying the Menu Items

Select Source.

Source List Icons

Select More.Menu Items

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 216 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

217

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

Features

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

1. Select More, then Screen Settings.

2. Use (+, (- or others to adjust the setting.

■Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 222

■Changing the Screen Settings

1Changing the Screen Settings

The followings are adjustable screen settings:

•Brightness

•Contrast

•Black Level

•Display

Changes between the daytime or nighttime

modes.

•Beep

Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the

screen.

•Fade Timer

Sets the screen black out timing.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 217 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

218

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Audio/Information Screen

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various

setup options.

Press the (display) button to change the display.

■Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and

INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.

(Display) Button Audio

Info

Audio/Information Screen

Navigation

Phone

AUDIO ButtonNAV Button

PHONE Button INFO Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 218 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Continued

Features

■Audio

Shows the current audio information.

■Navigation

Shows the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■Phone

Shows the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 367

■Info

Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate

to select an item, then press .

■Trip computer (Current Drive)

Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■Trip computer (History of Trip A)

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well

as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The

history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■Deleting the history manually

1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .

2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes,

then press .

■Clock/Wallpaper

Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 219 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

220

Features

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■Import wallpaper

You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash

drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

adapter cable.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,

Clock/Wallpaper Type.

4. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen will change to the wallpaper

list.

5. Move to select Add New, then press .

6. Rotate to select a desired picture.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side

on the screen.

7. Press , then move to select Start

Import.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Then the display will return to the

wallpaper list.

■Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.

Images in a folder cannot be imported.

•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.

•The file format of the image that can be imported

is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).

•The individual file size limit is 6 MB.

•The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If

the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the

image is displayed in the middle of the screen with

the extra area appearing in black.

•Up to 255 files can be selected.

•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,

the No files detected message appears.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 220 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

■Select wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.

3. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper.

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

5. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Set, then press .

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

■Delete wallpaper

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.

3. Move to select Wallpaper.

uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.

4. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .

uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.

5. Press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

7. Rotate to select Yes, then press to delete completely.

uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup

From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview

and press to see a preview at full-size screen.

To go back to the previous screen, press to select

OK, or press the BACK button.

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be

previewed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 221 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

222

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Features

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Sound, then press .

Rotate to scroll through the following

choices:

1Adjusting the Sound

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.

SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle

speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As

you slow down, audio volume decreases.

SETTINGS Button

Speed-sensitive

Volume

Compensation

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

Subwoofer

SVC

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 222 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Features

Display Setup

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Brightness, then press

4. Rotate to adjust the setting.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Background Color,

then press .

4. Rotate to select the setting you want,

then press .

■Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

You can change the Contrast and Black Level

settings in the same manner.

■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 223 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

224

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

Voice Control Operation

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of

the navigation system functions.

The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the

steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control

system:

•Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are

using.

•Close the windows and moonroof.

•Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone

on the ceiling.

•Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.

•Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your

command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

•Refer to the Voice Help feature.

2Refer to the navigation System Manual

■Voice Recognition

1Voice Control Operation

When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks

what you would like to do. Press and release the

button again to bypass this prompt and give a

command.

1Voice Recognition

The voice control system can only be used from the

driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes

noises from the front passenger’s side.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 224 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

Features

The system accepts these commands on the

Voice Portal screen.

•Call Your contact name

•Call Phone Number

•Find nearest POI category name

•Go home

•Route menu

•Cancel route

The system accepts these commands on any

screen.

•Call by number

•Call by name

Contacts that are imported from your

phone to the vehicle are all made available

by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded

for each of your Speed Dial entries.

■Voice Portal Commands

■Phone Commands

2Refer to the Navigation System Manual

The system accepts these commands on any

screen.

•Trip computer

•Traffic information

•Display clock

•Display wallpaper

■Navigation Commands

■Info Commands When the (Talk) button is pressed,

available voice commands appear on the

screen.

For a complete list of commands, say “Voice

Help” after the beep.

■On Screen Commands

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 225 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

226

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

The system accepts these commands on

most screens.

•Climate control automatic*1

•Climate control off*1

•Air conditioner on*1

•Air conditioner off*1

•Climate control defrost on*1

•Climate control defrost off*1

•Rear defrost on*1

•Rear defrost off*1

•Climate control fresh air

•Climate control recirculate

•Climate control vent

•Climate control bi-level

•Climate control floor

•Climate control floor and defrost

•Fan speed up

•Fan speed down

•Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)

•Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15

to 29°C)

•Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to

87°F, 15 to 29°C)

•Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57

to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)

•Temperature up

•Temperature down

■Climate Control Commands •Driver temperature up

•Driver temperature down

•Passenger temperature up

•Passenger temperature down

•Temperature max heat

•Temperature max cool

•Driver temperature max heat

•Driver temperature max cool

•Passenger temperature max heat

•Passenger temperature max cool

•Climate control sync on*1

•Climate control sync off*1

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

The system accepts these commands on

most screens.

■Using Song By VoiceTM

Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you

to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or

iPod® device using your voice.

To activate this mode, you must press the

(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen

and say: ”Music search.”

■Audio Commands

■Song By VoiceTM commands

•Music search

•List album (specify album)

•List artist (specify artist)

•List composer (specify composer)

•List genre (specify genre)

•List playlist (specify playlist)

•Play album (specify album)

•Play artist (specify artist)

•Play composer (specify composer)

•Play genre (specify genre)

•Play playlist (specify playlist)

•Play song (specify song)

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 226 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

Features

■HDD commands

•Hard Disc Drive play

•Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•Hard Disc Drive skip forward

•Hard Disc Drive skip back

•Hard Disc Drive album up*2

•Hard Disc Drive album down*2

•Hard Disc Drive track up

•Hard Disc Drive track down

•Hard Disc Drive playlist up*2

•Hard Disc Drive playlist down*2

•Hard Disc Drive track random*1

•Hard Disc Drive track repeat*1

•Hard Disc Drive track scan*1

•Hard Disc Drive normal play

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

*2: These commands are available only in

the corresponding playback mode.

For example, “Artist” commands are

available only in “Artist” mode.

■Radio commands

•Audio on*1

•Audio off*1

•Radio on*1

•Radio off*1

•Radio select FM

•Radio select AM

•Radio tune to # FM

(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)

•Radio tune to # AM

(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to

1710 [seventeen ten])

•Radio seek up

•Radio seek down

•Radio next station

•Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)

•Radio scan*1

•Radio select XM

•XM channel #

(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])

•XM channel down

•XM category up

•XM category down

•XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)

•XM scan*1

•XM category mode

•XM channel mode

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

NOTE:

Radio volume levels cannot be controlled

using voice control.

■Disc commands

•Disc play

•Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•Disc skip forward

•Disc skip back

•Disc track random*1

•Disc track repeat*1

•Disc track scan*1

•Disc folder up

•Disc folder down

•Disc folder random*1

•Disc folder repeat*1

•Disc folder scan*1

•Disc normal play

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 227 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

228

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

■iPod® commands

•iPod play

•iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•iPod skip forward

•iPod skip back

•iPod track shuffle*1

•iPod album shuffle*1

•iPod track repeat*1

•iPod normal play

•What am I listening to?

•Who am I listening to?

•Who is this?

•What’s playing?

•Who’s playing?

•What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

■USB commands

•USB play

•USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)

•USB skip forward

•USB skip back

•USB track random*1

•USB track repeat*1

•USB track scan*1

•USB folder up

•USB folder down

•USB folder random*1

•USB folder repeat*1

•USB folder scan*1

•USB normal play

*1: These commands toggle the function

on and off, so the command may not match

your intended action.

■Bluetooth® Audio commands

•Bluetooth Audio play

•Bluetooth Audio skip forward

•Bluetooth Audio skip back

•Bluetooth Audio group up

•Bluetooth Audio group down

•Bluetooth Audio pause

•Bluetooth Audio resume

•Bluetooth Audio track random

•Bluetooth Audio track repeat

NOTE:

Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work

on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio

devices.

■AUX commands

•Auxiliary play

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 228 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Continued

Features

■Pandora® commands*

The system accepts these commands while

the Pandora® is playing.

•Pandora play

•Pandora skip forward

•Pandora station up

•Pandora station down

•Pandora pause

•Pandora resume

•Pandora thumbs up

•Pandora thumbs down

■AhaTM commands*

The system accepts these commands while

the AhaTM is playing.

•Aha Radio play

•Aha Radio skip forward

•Aha Radio skip back

•Aha Radio station up

•Aha Radio station down

•Aha Radio resume

•Aha Radio pause

•Aha Radio like

•Aha Radio dislike

■Internet service commands*

•Internet service play

•Internet service skip forward*1

•Internet service skip back*1

•Internet service station up*1

•Internet service station down*1

•Internet service resume*1

•Internet service pause*1

•Internet service like*1

•Internet service dislike*1

*1: The system accepts these commands

while the Internet service is playing.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 229 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

230

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

In keyboard screen, letters can be selected

by saying each individual letter or by saying

a keyword phrase. These keyword phrases

are:

■Keyboard Entry Commands ■Letters

Say . . . Or say . . .

AApple/Alpha

BBoy/Bravo

CCharlie

DDog/Delta

EEdward/Echo

FFrank/Foxtrot

GGeorge/Golf

HHenry/Hotel

IIgloo/India

JJohn/Juliet

KKing/Kilo

LLarry/Lima

MMary/Mike

NNancy/November

OOscar

PPaul/Papa

QQueen/Quebec

RRobert/Romeo

S Sam/Sierra

TTom/Tango

UUncle/Uniform

VVictor

WWilliam/Whiskey

XX-ray

YYellow/Yankee

ZZebra/Zulu

■Numbers

Number . . . Or say . . .

0Zero

1One

2Two

3Three

4Four

5Five

6Six

7Seven

8Eight

9Nine

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 230 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

■Symbols

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

-Hyphen

!Exclamation point

“Double Quote

#Pound

$Dollar

%Percent

&Ampersand

‘Apostrophe

(Open Parenthesis

)Close Parenthesis

~Tilde

/Slash

<Less than

>Greater than

{Open Brace

}Close Brace

■Accented letters

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

ÀA grave

ÂA circumflex

ÄA umlaut

ÇC cedilla

ÈE grave

ÉE acute

ÊE circumflex

ËE umlaut

ÌI grave

ÎI circumflex

ÏI umlaut

ÔO circumflex

ÙU grave

ÛU circumflex

ÜU umlaut

■Punctuation marks

Symbol . . . Or say . . .

@At Sign

^Caret

*Asterisk

_Underscore

`Back Quote

,Comma

.Dot

?Question mark

:Colon

;Semicolon

+Plus

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 231 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

232

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

Playing AM/FM Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Tune Up/Down Icons

Select or to tune the radio

frequency.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Source

Select to change a band or change

an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to search up

and down the selected band for a

station with a strong signal.

Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 232 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 233

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

and hold .

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio

You can control the AM/FM radio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating

stereo FM broadcasts.

Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

Switching the Audio Mode

Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU

button and selecting Change Source on the Audio

menu screen.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into

the preset memory.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 233 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

234

Features

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■To find an RDS station from Station List

1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select the station, then press .

■Manual update

Updates your available station list at any time.

1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate to select Station List, then press .

3. Rotate to select Refresh, then press .

■Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS

automatically turns on, and the frequency display

changes to the station name. However, when the

signals of that station become weak, the display

changes from the station name to the frequency.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 234 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Features

■Radio text

Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .

■Scan

Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .

To turn off scan, press to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Radio text

The text indicator comes on when you received a text

message. The indicator stays on until you read the

message.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 235 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

236

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Features

Playing XM® Radio

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Category Up/Down Icons

Select or to display and select

an XM® Radio category.

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

To listen to a stored channel,

select 1-12.

Presets

Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to the previous

or next channel.

In channel mode, select and hold to

change the channel rapidly.

Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to tune the radio

frequency.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 236 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Features

1. Select the XM® mode.

2Audio Remote Controls P. 168

2Audio with Touch Screen P. 216

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select XM Tune Mode, then press .

4. Rotate to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .

5. Rotate to select Channel List, then press .

6. Rotate to select a channel from a list, then press .

2. Select More.

3. Select Tune Mode.

4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.

5. Select a channel using the , , , icons on the tune mode screen or

the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

■To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio

You can control the XM® radio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

In the channel mode, all available channels are

selectable. In the category mode, you can select a

channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not

broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This

does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 237 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

238

Features

To store a station:

1. Tune to the selected station.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Save Preset, then press .

4. Rotate to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press

and hold .

2. Select More.

3. Select Save Preset.

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

■Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio

You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset

memory.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 238 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Continued

Features

Playing a CD

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or

AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder, and

to skip to the beginning of the

previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks

(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).

Select and hold to move rapidly within

a track/file.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item, then

press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 239 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

240

Features

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a file from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

1Playing a CD

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can

cause the CD to jam in the unit.

WMA files protected by digital rights management

(DRM) cannot be played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, then

skips to the next file.

Text data appears on the display under the following

circumstances:

•When you select a new folder, file, or track.

•When you change the audio mode to CD.

•When you insert a CD.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,

the system reloads the CD automatically after several

seconds.

You can control a CD audio using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

Folder Selection

File Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 240 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Features

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-

second sampling of the first file in each of the main

folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,

WMA, or AAC).

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files

in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.

Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files

in the current folder in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random

order.

Random/Repeat is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 241 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

242

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have

been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play

the tracks using various search methods.

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

CD Slot

Insert a CD about halfway into the

CD slot.

(CD Eject) Button

Press to eject a CD.

Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next playlist/

album, and to skip to the beginning

of the previous playlist/album.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change tracks.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous

display or cancel a setting.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

SETTINGS Button

Press to go the Setting menu screen.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 242 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD

the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press .

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Rec to HDD, then press .

■Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can

mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on

the HDD.

2Editing an Album or Playlist P. 246

2Editing Track Information P. 249

If you stop the engine or the power system is turned

off while recording a CD, there may be pauses

between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available

during recording.

You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM,

HDD, etc.) while recording.

Please note that there is no compensation offered in

the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or

the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Clearing the HDD

Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.

2Deleting all HDD Data P. 317

■Stop Recording

■Recording a CD Manually

Recording Indicator

Recording

Ready to record

1Recording a CD Manually

Use this feature to set up the music search abilities

when using Song By Voice™ (SBV) commands.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 243 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

244

Features

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a track from the Music Search list.

uTitle information is displayed if found in

the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database) stored on the HDD.

uThe HDD has two types of playlists:

original playlists and user playlists. An

original playlist is automatically created

for each album when a music CD is

recorded. You can customize up to six

user playlists provided on the HDD by

adding tracks from your original playlists.

■How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

You can control the HDD audio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256

Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded

onto CDs or other devices.

Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed

using ultra-efficient compression technology;

therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the

original.

If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and

cannot be recovered.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the display.

2Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 270

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 244 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first track in each album.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all

tracks on HDD.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current

album.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.

Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current

album in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.

Random/Repeat is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 245 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

246

Features

Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current

playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.

■Editing an album

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press

3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. To edit an album name:

Rotate to select Edit name, then press

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen.

To delete an album:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

To edit track information or delete a track:

Rotate to select List Tracks, then press

2Editing Track Information P. 249

■Editing an Album or Playlist

1Editing an Album or Playlist

The maximum number of songs in each of the six

user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites

the oldest songs.

The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with

a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.

Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding

a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist

will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.

Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the

album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.

Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a

user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.

The folder retains the playlist name and artist

information.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 246 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

Features

■Editing a playlist

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press

3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. To edit a playlist name:

Rotate to select Edit name, then press

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen.

To delete a playlist:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

To edit track information or delete a track:

Rotate to select List Tracks, then press

2Editing Track Information P. 249

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 247 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

■Creating a new playlist

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press

3. Rotate to select Playlists, then press

4. Rotate to select Create New Playlist,

then press .

uEnter the name using the interface dial or

the audio with touch screen, then select

tracks from the Music Search list.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 248 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Continued

Features

Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press

3. Rotate to select Tracks, then press .

4. Rotate to select a track you want to edit

or delete, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. To edit track information:

Rotate to select Edit name, then press

uEnter the track name, track artist, etc.

using the interface dial or the audio with

touch screen. Move , rotate to

select OK, then press .

To delete a track:

Rotate to select Delete, then press .

■Editing Track Information

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 249 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

250

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing

the Gracenote® Album Info.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Edit/Delete, then press

3. Rotate to select Albums, then press .

4. Rotate to select an album you want to

edit, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Edit name, then press

6. Move to select Get Music Info, then

press .

uThe system starts to access the

Gracenote® Album Info.

■Displaying Music Information

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 250 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included

with the navigation system.

1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or

connect the USB flash drive that includes

the update.

2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD

mode.

3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Gracenote Album DB Info Update.

4. Rotate to select Update from CD or

Update from USB, then press .

uThe system starts updating and the

confirmation message appears on the

screen. Press to finish.

■Updating Gracenote® Album Info

1Updating Gracenote® Album Info

To acquire updated files:

•Consult a dealer.

•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.

•Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.

Once you perform an update, any information you

edited before will be overwritten or erased.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 251 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

Playing an iPod®

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then select

the iPod mode.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

Album Bar

Select to search for an album.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a song.

Select to display the menu items.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on

and off.

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item,

then press to set your selection.

Move up, down, right and left to

select secondary menu.

USB Indicator

Appears when an iPod® is connected.

Album Art

Album Art Icon

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 252 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

1. Select the album bar.

uThe image of the current album is displayed.

2. Select or icon to search for an album.

uWhen the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

■How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album

You cannot select an album while the vehicle is

moving.

Select to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album

image.

Select the

album bar.

Album Bar Album Image

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 253 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

254

Features

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a song from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

You can control an iPod® using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256

Available operating functions vary on models or

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 254 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Features

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Shuffle/Repeat, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a

selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,

or composers) in random order.

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 255 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

256

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod® using voice

commands.

■To enable SBV

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Song by Voice, then

press .

4. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

Setting options:

•On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are

available.

•Off: Disable the feature.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 256 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 257

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

■Searching for music using SBV

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.

2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music

Search” to activate the SBV feature for the

HDD and iPod®.

3. Press the button and say a command.

uExample 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a

list of songs by that artist. Select the

desired song to start playing.

uExample 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start

playing songs by that artist.

4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/back)

button on the steering wheel. The selected

song continues playing.

Once you have canceled this mode, you need

to press the button and say “Music Search”

again to re-activate this mode.

1Searching for music using SBV

Song By VoiceTM Commands List

2Song By VoiceTM commands P. 226

NOTE:

Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks

stored on the HDD or iPod®.

You can add phonetic modifications of difficult

words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,

songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.

2Phonetic Modification P. 258

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 257 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

258

Features

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV

to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when

searching for music on the HDD or iPod®.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings,

then press .

3. Rotate to select Song by Voice

Phonetic Modification, then press .

4. Move and rotate to select New

Modification, then press .

5. Rotate to select HDD or iPod, then

press .

■Phonetic Modification

1Phonetic Modification

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By

Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification

items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 258 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

6. Rotate to select the item to modify

(e.g., Artist), then press .

uThe list of the selected item appears on

the screen.

7. Rotate to select an entry (e.g., No

Name), then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the

screen.

uThe listen to the current phonetic

modification, rotate to select Play,

then press .

uTo delete the current phonetic

modification, rotate to select

Delete, then press .

8. Rotate to select Modify, then press

9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to

use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

10. Move to select OK to exit.

uThe artist “No Name” is phonetically

modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV

mode, you can press the (Talk)

button and use the voice command

“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the

artist “No Name.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 259 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

260

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Features

Playing Internet Radio

Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable.

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

U.S. models

Compatible phones only

1Playing Internet Radio

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora

is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

USB Indicator

Appears when a phone is connected.

Rating Icon

Audio with Touch Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Skip Icon

Select to skip a song.

Select to display the menu items.

Station Up/Down Icons

Select to change a station.

Source

Select Pandora® or AhaTM.

Play/Pause Icon

Select to resume or play a song.

Like/Dislike Icons

Select to evaluate a song.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system on and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item, then press

to set your selection. Move up, down, right

and left to select secondary menu.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 260 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

Features

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio

system. The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

The menu items are shown in the lower half of

the audio/information screen.

Rotate to select an item and press .

To select Change Source, press the MENU

button, then press .

■Pandora® Menu

•Skip Forward •Dislike

•Play/Pause •Bookmark This Song

•Station List •Bookmark This Artist

•Like •Change Source

1Playing Internet Radio

To find out if your phone is compatible with this

feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that

selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user

enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app

must first be installed on your phone. Visit

www.pandora.com. for more information.

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio

system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®

Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio

system is selected.

1Pandora® Menu

You can control Pandora® using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2Pandora®* P. 273

There are restrictions on the number of songs you

can skip or dislike in a given hour.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 261 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

262

Features

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.

The available items are:

■Operating a menu item

The menu items are shown in the lower half of

the audio/information screen.

Rotate to select an item and press .

To select Change Source or Stations, press

the MENU button, then press .

■AhaTM Menu

•Like •View text

•Dislike •View list

•Play/Pause •Reply

•15sec Back •Change Source

•30sec Skip •Stations

1AhaTM Menu

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that

organizes your favorite web content into live radio

stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,

location-based services, and audio updates from

social media sites.

You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

Available operating functions vary on software

versions. Some functions may not be available on the

vehicle’s audio system.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2AhaTM* P. 275

The menu items vary depending on the station you

selected.

To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app

must be installed on your phone. Visit

owners.honda.com/apps for more information.

You must have a previously set up Aha account prior

to using the service in your vehicle. Visit

www.aharadio.com for more information.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 262 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

263

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

Playing a USB Flash Drive

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,

WMA, or AAC*1 format.

Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then select the USB mode.

2USB Adapter Cable P. 165

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Audio/Information Screen

BACK Button

Press to go back to the previous display.

Select to display the menu items.

Source

Select to change an audio source.

USB Indicator

Appears when a USB flash drive is

connected.

Folder Up/Down Icons

Select to skip to the next folder, and

to skip to the beginning of the

previous folder.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within

a file.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the audio system

on and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob

Turn to adjust the volume.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button

Press and turn to select an item, then press

to set your selection. Move up, down, right

and left to select secondary menu.

Audio with Touch Screen

MENU Button

Press to display the menu items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 263 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

264

Features

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Music Search, then

press .

3. Rotate , move or , then press to

select a file from the Music Search list.

■How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

You can control a USB flash drive using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

Use the recommended USB flash drives.

2USB Flash Drives P. 280

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights

management (DRM) are not played.

The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then

skips to the next file.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message

on the audio/information screen.

2iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 271

Folder Selection

File Selection

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 264 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

265

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Features

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Scan or Random/

Repeat, then press .

3. Rotate to select a mode, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select Random/Repeat.

3. Select a mode.

■To turn off a play mode

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select the mode you want to turn off, then press .

1. Select More.

2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

■How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

Play Mode Menu Items

Scan

Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the

first file in each of the main folders.

Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files

in the current folder.

Random/Repeat

Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.

Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder

in random order.

Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

Random/Repeat is selected.

Interface Dial

Random/Repeat is selected.

Audio with Touch Screen

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 265 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible

phone.

This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

2Phone Setup P. 373

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming

audio capabilities are compatible with the system.

For a list of compatible phones:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

1-888-528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-

528-7876.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data

device functions while driving.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,

there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice

commands.

2Voice Control Operation P. 224

Bluetooth Indicator

Appears when your

phone is connected to

HFL.

Audio/

Information

Screen

Audio with Touch

Screen

Play Icon

Pause Icon

Select to display

the menu items.

Source

Select to change

an audio source.

(Power) Button

Press to turn the

audio system on

and off.

VOL (Volume)

Knob

Turn to adjust the

volume.

Interface Dial/

ENTER Button

Press and turn to

select an item, then

press to set your

selection. Move up,

down, right and left

to select secondary

menu.

Skip/Seek Icons

Select or

to change files.

MENU Button

Press to display

the menu items.

Folder Up/Down

Icons

Select or to

change folders.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 266 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

267

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and

connected to HFL.

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.

If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-

compatible phone, which is not compatible

for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be

connected.

■To pause or resume a file

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Rotate to select Play or Pause, then press .

Select the play icon or pause icon.

Press the (pick-up) button on the steering

wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio

is playing.

2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 367

Press the (hang-up/back) button to end

the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your

phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating

instructions.

The pause function may not be available on some

phones.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing

from your phone.

■Switching to HFL

Interface Dial

Audio with Touch Screen

1Switching to HFL

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the

pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 267 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

268

Features

Audio Error Messages

CD Player

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.

Error Message Cause Solution

HEAT ERROR High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

UNSUPPORTED Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file

plays automatically.

BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS

MANUAL

PUSH EJECT

Mechanical error

●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the

error message is cleared.

●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

disc again.

2Protecting CDs P. 278

●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out

the disc.

●Insert a different disc.

If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.

●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,

contact your dealer.

Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

MECH ERROR

CHANGER ERROR

CHECK DISK LOAD

BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS

MANUAL

Servo error

CHECK DISC Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.

2Protecting CDs P. 278

Audio system without touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 268 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

269

uuAudio Error Messages uCD Player

Features

Error Message Cause Solution

Unplayable File Track/file format not supported ●Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file

plays automatically.

Bad Disc

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Push Eject Mechanical error

●Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the

error message is cleared.

●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the

disc again.

2Protecting CDs P. 278

●If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out

the disc.

●Insert a different disc.

If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.

●If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,

contact a dealer.

Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Mecha Error

Bad Disc

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Servo error

Check Disc Disc error ●Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.

2Protecting CDs P. 278

Heat Error High temperature ●Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

Audio system with touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 269 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

270

uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Features

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the

following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Navigation system is suspended due to low air pressure.

System will resume when vehicle moves to an area of lower

altitude.

The HDD is inoperable due to low atmospheric pressure. Move

your vehicle to a lower altitude where atmospheric pressure is

higher.

HDD access error.

Please consult your dealer. —

The navigation system temperature is too high. For

protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until

the error message is cleared.

The navigation system temperature is too low. For

protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.

The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the

temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation

system starts up automatically when the display warms up.

Unplayable File Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be

skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.

Models with navigation system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 270 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

271

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

Continued

Features

iPod®/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the

following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

USB ERROR There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.

BAD USB DEVICE

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS

MANUAL

An incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn

it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

iPod NO SONG Appears when the iPod® is empty.

UNSUPPORTED VER. Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,

update the iPod® software to the newer version.

CONNECT RETRY Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

UNPLAYABLE FILE Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message

appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

USB NO SONG Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash

drive.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when the supported device is

connected, reconnect the device.

Audio system without touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 271 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

272

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

Features

Error Message Solution

USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the

USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s

Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system

off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,

update the iPod® software to the newer version.

Connect Retry Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message

appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

No Data

Appears when the iPod® is empty.

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash

drive.

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is

connected, reconnect the device.

Audio system with touch screen

iPod®

USB flash drive

iPod® and USB flash drive

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 272 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

273

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®*

Continued

Features

Pandora®*

If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect

the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do

not reconnect the device that caused the error.

There is no station list in the device.

Please add the station list to your device.

No stations have been created.

Please create a station on the device.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device

to create a station.

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may

skip each hour.

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may

skip each hour.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the

predetermined number of times in an hour.

U.S. models

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 273 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

274

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®*

Features

Error Message Solution

Unable to save rating.

Unable to save bookmark

Unable to skip

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

No data Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.

Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update

Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again

later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your

mobile phone.

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your

device.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 274 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

275

uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM*

Features

AhaTM*

If an error occurs while playing AhaTM, you may see the following error messages.

If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message Solution

Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your

mobile device. Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.

Incompatible USB Device

Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect

the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.

Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

U.S. models

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 275 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

276

Features

General Information on the Audio System

XM® Radio Service*

1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in

the display: Turn the MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial until 0

appears.

2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®

website to subscribe.

Switch to the XM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or operating

the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the

service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Loading:

XM® is loading the audio or program information.

Ch off air:

The channel is not currently broadcasting.

Ch unauthorized:

XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

No signal:

The signal is too weak in the current location.

Ch unavailable:

No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or

title information is unavailable.

Check antenna:

There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

■Subscribing to XM® Radio

■Receiving XM® Radio

■XM® Radio Display Messages

1Subscribing to XM® Radio

Contact Information for XM® Radio:

US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 852-

9696

Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or (877)

209-0079

1Receiving XM® Radio

The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;

therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause

satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are

more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and

mountains the farther north you travel from the

equator.

You may experience reception problems under the

following circumstances:

•In a location with an obstruction to the south of

your vehicle.

•In tunnels

•On the lower level of a multi-tiered road

•Large items carried on the roof rack

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 276 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

277

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

Continued

Features

Recommended CDs

•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.

•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.

•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1Recommended CDs

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded

under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not

play either.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and

worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the

Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are

registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a

trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.

■CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files

The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

Also includes:

Models with navigation system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 277 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

278

Features

■Protecting CDs

Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:

•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.

•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.

•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.

•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.

•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.

•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

1Protecting CDs

NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside

and damage the audio unit.

Examples:

●Damaged CDs

Bubbled/

Wrinkled

With Label/

Sticker

Using

Printer Label

Kit

Sealed With Plastic Ring

●Poor quality

CDs

Chipped/

Cracked

Warped Burrs

●Small CDs

3-inch

(8-cm)

●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and

excessively thick CDs

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 278 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

279

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

Continued

Features

Compatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

■iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

Model

iPod classic® 80GB/160GB

iPod classic® 120GB

iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod® (5th generation)

iPod nano®

iPod touch®

Model

iPod® (5th generation)

iPod classic® 80GB/160GB

iPod classic® 120GB

iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)

iPod nano®

iPod touch®

iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S

1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

This system may not work with all software versions

of these devices.

Audio system without touch screen

Audio system with touch screen

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 279 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod® and USB Flash Drives

280

Features

•Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.

•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.

•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.

•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.

•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

■USB Flash Drives

1USB Flash Drives

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored

order. This order may be different from the order

displayed on your PC or device.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 280 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

281

Continued

Features

Customized Features*

Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

■How to customize

With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, press and hold the DISP button, then rotate

to select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,

System Settings or Info Settings and press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Customized Features*

When you customize settings, make sure that the

vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.

To customize other features, rotate , and press .

2List of customizable options P. 294

Models without navigation system

DISP Button

Audio/Information Screen

MENU/SEL (Selector) Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 281 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuCustomized Features*u

282

Features

With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate to

select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,

System Settings, Info Settings, or Navi Settings and press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Models with navigation system

SETTINGS Button

Audio/Information Screen

Interface Dial

1Customized Features*

When you customize setting, make sure that the

vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P.

To customize other features, rotate , move , ,

or , and press .

2List of customizable options P. 304

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 282 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

283

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

■Customization flow

Models without navigation system

Clock Format

Background Color

Header Clock Display

Factory data reset

Clock Adjustment

Press and hold the DISP button.

Language

Default

Edit Pairing Code

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Device List

Brightness

Contrast

Black level

Beep

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Type

Wallpaper

System

Settings

Bluetooth

Display

Clock

Others

Display Operation Restriction Tips

Voice Recognition

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 283 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

284

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Keyless Access Light Flash

Auto Light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Forward Collision Warning

Distance*

Door Unlock Mode

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Memory Position Link

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Maintenance Reset

Default All

Vehicle

Settings

Driver Assist System Setup*

Meter

Setup

Driving Position Setup*

Keyless

Access

Setup

Lighting

Setup

Door

Setup

Maintenance Info.

Keyless Access Beep

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 284 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

285

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

Wallpaper

Source Select Popup

Clock Type

Sound

Default

Cover Art

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth Device List

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority*

Default

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Audio

Settings

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Info

Settings

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 285 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

286

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

Add Bluetooth Device

Disconnect

Edit Speed Dial

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

Default

Use Contact Photo

Enable Text/Email

Select Account*

Message Auto Reading

New Text/Email Alert

Phone

Settings

Connect

Phone

Text/Email

Bluetooth

Device

List

Phone

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 286 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

287

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

Display

Show with Turn Signal

Reference Lines

Default

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Camera

Settings

LaneWatch

Rear

Camera

Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 287 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

288

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

■Customization flow

Models with navigation system

Song by Voice

Song by Phonetic Modification

Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Press the SETTINGS button.

Volume

Voice Prompt

Message Auto Reading

Volume

Interface Dial Feedback

Verbal Reminder

Brightness

Contrast

Black level

Bluetooth Status

Bluetooth Device List

Edit Pairing Code

Default

Sound/

Beep

Display

System

Settings

Bluetooth

Voice

Recog.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 288 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

289

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

System Device Information

Factory data reset

Background Color

Header Clock Display

Clock Reset

Auto Time Zone*

Auto Daylight*

Clock

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Clock

Units

Language

Voice Command Tips

Others

Wallpaper

Clock/Wallpaper

Type

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 289 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

290

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

“Trip A” Reset Timing

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Forward Collision Warning Distance

Default

Memory Position Link

Door Unlock Mode

Keyless Access Light Flash

Interior Light Dimming Time

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Auto light Sensitivity

Key And Remote Unlock Mode

Keyless Lock Answer Back

Security Relock Timer

Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

Maintenance Reset

Vehicle

Settings

Meter

Setup

Driver

Assist

System

Setup

Driving Position Setup

Keyless

Access

Setup

Lighting

Setup

Door

Setup

Maintenance Info.

Keyless Access Beep

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 290 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

291

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

Show with Turn Signal

Reference Lines

Next Maneuver Pop up

Default

Fixed Guideline

Dynamic Guideline

Default

Sound

Source Select Setup

Cover Art

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Bluetooth Device List

Recording from CD

Recording Quality

HDD Info

Gracenote Album DB Info Update

Update Gracenote Album Info

Delete all HDD Data

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority*

Camera

Settings

Rear

Camera

LaneWatch

Audio

Settings

Display Brightness

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 291 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

292

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

Add Bluetooth

Device

Disconnect

Default

Phone Connect phone

Edit Bluetooth

Device

Add Bluetooth

Device

Bluetooth Device

List

Edit Speed Dial

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Automatic Phone Sync

Use Contact Photo

Default

Enable Text/Email

Select Account

New Text/Email Alert

Text/Email

Phone

Settings

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 292 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

293

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

Auto Daylight*

Clock Reset

INFO Screen Preference

Clock Format

Auto Time Zone*

Clock/Wallpaper Type

Clock Adjustment

Clock

Default

Others

Info

Settings

Navi

Settings See Navigation System Manual.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 293 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

294

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

■List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Display

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen. —

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen. —

Black level Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen. —

Beep Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when

you operate the selector knob. On*1/Off

Blue-

tooth

Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

paired phone, and create a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 339

—

Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code.

2To change the pairing code setting P. 341 Random*1/Fixed

Voice Recognition Turns the voice recognition on and off. On*1/Off

Models without navigation system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 294 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

295

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Type Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

●Changes the wallpaper type.

●Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

●Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

2Wallpaper Setup P. 189

Blank/Galaxy*1/

Metallic/Add New

Clock Adjustment Adjust Clock.

2Setting the Clock P. 88 —

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 24H to 12H. 12H*1/24H

Others

Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/

Spanish

Display Operation

Restriction Tips

Selects whether the display operation restriction

message is shown or not. On*1/Off

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/

information screen and the audio with touch screen*.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/

Green

Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on or not. On*1/Off

Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2Defaulting All the Settings P. 315 Yes/No

Default Cancels /Resets all customized items in the

System Settings group as default. Yes/No

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 295 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

296

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Driver

Assist

System

Setup*

Forward Collision Warning

Distance*

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns

FCW on and off.

Long*1/Normal/

Short/Off

Meter

Setup

Adjust Outside Temp.

Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few

degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A

and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B

and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset*1

Driving

Position

Setup*

Memory Position Link Changes the driver’s seat and door mirror

positions to a stored setting. On*1/Off

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 296 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

297

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Keyless

Access

Setup

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/

All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you

unlock/lock the doors. On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab

either front door handle. On*1/Off

Lighting

Setup

Interior Light Dimming

Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

on after you close the doors.

60seconds/

30seconds*1/

15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights

stay on after you close the driver’s door.

60seconds/

30seconds/

15seconds*1/

0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come

on.

Max/High/Mid*1/

Low/Min

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 297 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

298

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Door

Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking

feature.

With Vehicle Speed*1/

Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

Driver Door with Shift

to P*1/All Doors with

Shift to P/Driver Door

with IGN Off/All Doors

with IGN Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock

Mode

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to

unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All

Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors and the

tailgate to relock and the security system to set

after you unlock the vehicle without opening any

door or the tailgate.

90seconds/

60seconds/

30seconds*1

Mainte-

nance

Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have

performed the maintenance service. —

Default

All

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Vehicle Settings group as default. Yes/No

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 298 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

299

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 191

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,

Treble, Fader, Balance

and Subwoofer), Off/

Low/Mid*1/High (SVC)

Source Select Popup

Selects whether the list of selectable audio

sources comes on or not when Audio is selected

on the Function Change screen.

On/Off*1

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Audio device to HFL. —

Bluetooth Device List

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired

to HFL. —

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority*

Selects the connection to have priority. Bluetooth/USB*1

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Settings group as default. Yes/No

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

iPod®, Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM

mode

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 299 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

300

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Info

Settings

Clock/

Wall-

paper

type

Clock Type

See System Settings on P. 294 to P. 295

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Settings group as default. Yes/No

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 300 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

301

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Connect Phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

2Phone Setup P. 339

—

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 339

—

Phone

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2Speed Dial P. 350 —

Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. On*1/Off

Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an

incoming call after about four seconds. On/Off*1

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed*1/Mobile

Phone/Off

Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically

imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call

screen. On*1/Off

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 301 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

302

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Text/

Enable Text/Email Turns the text message/E-mail function on and

off. On*1/Off

Select Account*Selects a mail or text message account. —

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

screen when HFL receives a new text message/E-

mail.

On/Off*1

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an

incoming text message/E-mail.

●On- A text message/E-mail is always read

aloud.

●Off- A text message/E-mail is not read aloud.

●Auto- A text message/E-mail is read aloud only

when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone

Settings group as default. Yes/No

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 302 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

303

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera

Settings

Lane-

Watch

Show with Turn Signal Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on

when you move the turn signal lever to the

passenger side. On*1/Off

Reference Lines Selects whether the reference lines come on the

LaneWatch monitor. On*1/Off

Display

Brightness

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

LaneWatch group as default. Yes/No

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

LaneWatch group as default. Yes/No

Rear

Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or

not on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on

or not on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Camera group as default. Yes/No

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 303 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

304

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

■List of customizable options

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Display

Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information

screen. —

Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information

screen. —

Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information

screen. —

Sound/

Beep

Volume Changes the volume of the audio speakers. —

Interface Dial Feedback*Sets if and when the system reads aloud a

selection made using the Interface Dial. On*1/Off/Auto

Message Auto Reading

Selects whether the system automatically read

out message, does not read, or read out only

when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Verbal Reminder*Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off

Blue-

tooth

Bluetooth Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a

paired phone, and create a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 373

—

Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code.

2To change the pairing code setting P. 375 Random*1/Fixed

Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 304 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

305

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Voice

Recog.

Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. —

Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off

Song by Voice Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

2Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 256 On*1/Off

Song by Phonetic

Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in

the HDD or an iPod®.

2Phonetic Modification P. 258

—

Phonebook Phonetic

Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

2Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 388 —

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

Type

Clock Changes the clock display type. Analogue/Digital*1/

Small Digital/Off

Wallpaper

●Changes the wallpaper type.

●Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

●Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

2Wallpaper Setup P. 220

Blank/Galaxy*1/

Metallic/Time Zone

Clock Adjustment Adjust Clock.

2Setting the Clock P. 88 —

Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H

Auto Time Zone*

Sets the navigation system to automatically

adjust the clock when driving through different

time zones.

On*1/Off

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 305 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

306

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

System

Settings

Clock

Auto Daylight*

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust

the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one

hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.

On*1/Off

Clock Reset Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group. —

Other

Units*Changes the distance unit on the navigation map

screen. miles*1/km

Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/

Spanish

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is

disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only

voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/

information screen and the audio with touch screen.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/

Green

Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on or not. On*1/Off

System Device Information Displays the system/Device information. —

Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.

2Defaulting All the Settings P. 316 —

Default Cancels /Resets all customized items in the

System Settings group as default. Default/OK

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 306 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

307

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Driver

Assist

System

Setup

Forward Collision Warning

Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns

FCW on and off.

Long*1/Normal/

Short/Off

Meter

Setup

Adjust Outside Temp.

Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few

degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

(U.S.)

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C

(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,

average fuel economy A, average speed A*, and

elapsed time A*.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,

average fuel economy B, average speed B*, and

elapsed time B*.

With Refuel/IGN Off/

Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance

Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when

conditions are met to change power mode. On*1/Off

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 307 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

308

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Driving

Position

Setup

Memory Position Link Changes the driver’s seat and door mirror

positions to a stored setting. On*1/Off

Keyless

Access

Setup

Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the

driver’s door handle.

Drivers Door Only*1/

All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to blink when you

unlock/lock the doors. On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/

lock the doors. On*1/Off

Lighting

Setup

Interior Light Dimming

Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay

on after you close the doors.

60seconds/

30seconds*1/

15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights

stay on after you close the driver’s door.

60seconds/

30seconds/

15seconds*1/

0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come

on.

Max/High/Mid*1/

Low/Min

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 308 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

309

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Vehicle

Settings

Door

Setup

Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking

feature.

With Vehicle Speed*1/

Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock

automatically.

Driver Door with Shift

to P*1/All Doors with

Shift to P/Driver Door

with IGN Off/All Doors

with IGN Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock

Mode

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to

unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All

Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.

LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors and the

tailgate to relock and the security system to set

after you unlock the vehicle without opening any

door or the tailgate.

90seconds/

60seconds/

30seconds*1

Mainte-

nance

Info.

Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have

performed the maintenance service. —

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

Vehicle Settings group as default. Default/OK

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 309 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

310

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Camera

Settings

Lane-

Watch

Show with Turn Signal Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on

when you move the turn signal lever to the

passenger side. On*1/Off

Reference Lines Selects whether the reference lines come on the

LaneWatch monitor. On*1/Off

Next Maneuver Pop up Selects whether a turn direction screen of the

navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch

display. On*1/Off

Display

Brightness

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings. —

Contrast

Black Level

Color

Tint

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the

LaneWatch group as default. Default/OK

Rear

Camera

Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or

not on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on

or not on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear

Camera group as default. Default/OK

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 310 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

311

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

Sound Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.

2Adjusting the Sound P. 222

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,

Treble, Fader, Balance

and Subwoofer), Off/

Low/Mid*1/High (SVC)

Source Select Popup Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources

comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed. On/Off*1

Cover Art

Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®

Audio device to HFL. —

Bluetooth Device List

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired

to HFL. —

Recording from CD

Selects whether the songs on music CDs are

automatically recorded to the HDD or not. Auto*1/Manual

Recording Quality

Selects the quality of the music files recorded to

the HDD. Standard*1/High

CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod®, USB, Pandora®

or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

CD mode

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 311 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

312

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Audio

Settings

HDD Info Displays the HDD capacity. —

Gracenote Album DB Info Update

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database).

Update from USB*1/

Update from CD

Update Gracenote Album Info

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®

Media Database).

Update by USB*1/

Update by CD

Delete all HDD Data 2Deleting all HDD Data P. 317 —

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio

Settings group as default. Default/OK

Phone

Settings Phone

Connect phone

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or

disconnects a paired phone.

2Phone Setup P. 373

—

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a

paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

2Phone Setup P. 373

—

Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

2Phone Setup P. 373 —

HDD mode

CD or HDD mode

HDD mode

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 312 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

313

uuCustomized Features*u

Continued

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Phone

Settings

Phone

Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your

phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. On*1/Off

Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an

incoming call after about four seconds. On/Off*1

Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile

Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically

imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call

screen. On*1/Off

Text/

Enable Text/Email Turns the text message/E-mail function on and

off. On*1/Off

Select Account Selects a mail or text message account. —

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the

screen when HFL receives a new text message/E-

mail.

On/Off*1

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 313 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

314

uuCustomized Features*u

Features

*1:Default Setting

Setup

Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings

Info

Settings

Clock

Clock/

Wallpaper

type

Clock

See System Settings on P. 304 to P. 306.

Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment

Clock Format

Auto Time Zone*

Auto Daylight*

Clock Reset

Other INFO Screen Preference

Selects the top menu when the INFO button is

pressed.

●Info Top- A brief menu pops up.

●Info Menu- A full menu pops up.

●Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info

Menu*1/Off

Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info

Settings group as default. Default/OK

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 314 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

315

uuCustomized Features*uDefaulting All the Settings

Features

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Settings, then press

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Other,

then Factory Data Reset.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

4. Rotate to select Yes, then press to

reset the settings.

5. Rotate to select Yes, then press

again to reset the settings.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Press to select OK.

Models without navigation system

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 315 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

316

uuCustomized Features*uDefaulting All the Settings

Features

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Other, then press .

4. Rotate to select Factory Data Reset,

then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

6. Rotate to select Yes, then press

again to reset the settings.

uThe confirmation message will appear.

Press to select OK.

Models with navigation system

1Defaulting All the Settings

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset

all settings to default and delete all personal data.

The following settings will be reset:

•Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area

Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search

Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance

•Route Preference

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 316 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

317

uuCustomized Features*uDeleting all HDD Data

Features

Deleting all HDD Data

Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.

1. Turn on the audio system and select the

HDD mode.

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

3. Rotate to select Audio Settings, then

press .

4. Rotate to select Delete all HDD Data,

then press .

uThe confirmation message will appear.

5. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

Models with navigation system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 317 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

318

Features

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three

remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or

home security systems.

Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that

the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety

information, contact the manufacturer.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the

way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s

path.

Training HomeLink

If you have not trained any of the buttons in

HomeLink before, you should erase any

previously learned codes. To do this:

•Press and hold the two outside buttons for

about 20 seconds, until the red indicator

blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to

step 1.

•If you are training the second or third

button, go directly to step 1.

■Important Safety Precautions

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls., Inc.

Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage

door opener, confirm that the opener has an external

entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic

eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it

does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

Red Indicator

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 318 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

319

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Features

■Training a Button

1Training a Button

Retraining a Button

If you want to retrain a programmed button for a

new device, you do not have to erase all button

memory. You can replace the existing memory code

using this procedure:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button

until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and

follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”

Indicator remains on

for about 25 secs.

Standard transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for

2 secs, then remains on for

about 23 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

Erasing Codes

To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside

buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink

(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes

before selling the vehicle.

If you have any problems, see the device’s

instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call

HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

5. a.

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the

HomeLink button you want to program.

Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on

the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)

blink after 10 secs?

Press and hold the

programmed HomeLink

button for about a sec.

Does the device (garage

door opener) work?

Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink

button at the same time. Then, while

continuing to hold the HomeLink button,

press and release the button on the remote

every 2 secs.

Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

Training

Complete

Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Press and hold the HomeLink

button again.

The remote-controlled device

should operate.

Training Complete

The remote has a rolling code. Press the

“learn” button on the remote-controlled

device (e.g. garage door opener).

Within 30 secs, press and hold the

programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,

then remains on.

HomeLink LED

is on.

YES NO

YES

YES NO NO

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 319 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

320

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

Button: Press to give a command or answer a call.

Button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a

command.

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)

528-7876.

Voice control tips

•Adjust or close the vents and all windows, as noise

coming from them may interfere with the

microphone.

•Press and release the button before giving a

command. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•A command that consists of several words can be

spoken together. For example, say “Call 123-456-

7890” at once.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models without navigation system

Models without touch screen

(HFL Talk)

Button

Volume up

Microphone

(HFL Back) Button

Volume down

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 320 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

321

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

Features

•To hear general HFL information and help, say “Tutorial.”

•Say “Hands-free help” or “Help” any time to get help or hear a list of commands.

The audio display notifies you when there is

an incoming call.

■Help Features

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

Phone Dialing

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 321 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

322

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Press the (HFL Talk) button each time you give a command.

“Set pairing code”

Pair a phone to the system.

Edit the name of a paired phone.

Delete a paired phone from the system.

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system.

Hear which paired phone is linked, and its remaining battery life.

Search for another phone that has been paired.

Set the pairing code to either “Fixed” or “Random.”

Say a phone number.

Say a name after a phonebook entry is stored.

Redial the last number called.

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone or from your phone to HFL.

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call.

Send numbers or names during a call.

“Pair”

“Edit”

“Delete”

“List”

“Status”

“Next phone”

e.g.: “123-456-####”

e.g.: “Jim Smith”

“Phone setup”

“Call”/“Dial”

“Transfer”

“Mute”

“Send”

“Redial”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 322 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

323

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

“Change passcode”

Store a phonebook entry.

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry.

Delete a phonebook entry.

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries.

Transfer contacts from your phone to HFL.

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each key

cycle to access the system.

Change your security passcode.

Set how you want to be notified of an incoming call.

Set to automatically transfer calls from your phone to HFL when you

enter the vehicle.

Switch the system language between English and French.

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system.

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command.

“Store”

“Edit”

“Delete”

“List”

“Receive contact”*

“Security”

“Call notification”

“Auto transfer”

“Phonebook”

“System setup”

“Change language”*

“Tutorial”

“Hands-free help”

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security

passcode.

“Clear”

Canadian models

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 323 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

324

Features

■To pair a cell phone

1. If no phone has been paired to the system before, HFL gives you information

about how to pair the first phone.

If a phone has already been paired: say “Phone Setup” and “Pair” after the HFL

prompts.

2. Follow the HFL prompts and put your phone in discovery or search mode.

uHFL gives you a four-digit code and begins searching for your phone.

3. When your phone finds a Bluetooth® device, select HFL from the options and

enter the four-digit code.

4. Follow the HFL prompts and name the newly paired phone.

■To rename a paired phone

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts and rename the phone.

uIf there is more than one phone paired to the system, HFL asks you which

phone’s name you want to change.

■To delete a paired phone

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts.

uHFL asks you which phone you want to delete.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Press the button and wait for a beep before

giving a command.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Your phone must be in the discoverable or search

mode when pairing the phone. Refer to your

phone’s manual.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 324 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 325

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To hear the name of all paired phone

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “List” after the prompts.

3. HFL reads out all the paired phone’s names.

■To hear which paired phone is currently linked

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “Status” after the prompts.

3. HFL tells you which phone is linked with the system.

■To change the currently linked phone

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “Next Phone” after the prompts.

3. HFL disconnects the current phone, and searches for another paired phone.

4. Once another phone is found, it is connected to the system. HFL informs you

which phone is now linked.

■To change the pairing code setting

1. Say “Phone Setup.”

2. Say “Set Pairing Code” after the prompts.

3. If you want HFL to create a random code each time you pair a phone, say

“Random.” If you want to create your own four-digit code, say “Fixed.”

4. Follow the HFL prompts.

1Phone Setup

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to

switch to another phone, HFL informs you that the

original phone is linked again.

The “Status” and “Next Phone” commands use:

Only one paired phone at a time can be linked to HFL.

When there are two or more paired phones in the

vehicle, the first paired phone that the system finds is

linked.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 325 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

326

Features

You can make calls using any phone number or a name in the HFL phonebook, and

redial the last number called.

■Direct dialing a phone number

1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”

2. Say the number you want to dial after the prompts.

3. Say “Call” or “Dial” after the prompts.

■From the HFL phonebook

1. Say “Call” or “Dial.”

2. Say the name stored in the HFL phonebook after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts.

■To redial the last number called by HFL

Say “Redial.”

■To end a call

Press the (HFL back) button.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Press the button and wait for a beep before

giving a command.

HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, with has a maximum

range of about 30 feet (10 meters).

HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you

remove the key from the ignition switch. However,

this may weaken the vehicle’s battery.

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 326 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 327

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Press the button to answer the call, or the button to hang up. When there is

an incoming call, a call notification (if activated) sounds.

You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL. Press the

button and say “Transfer.”

To mute or unmute your voice during a call, press and release the button and say

“Mute.”

■Receiving a Call

■Transferring a Call

■Muting a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current

call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer

it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current and answer the incoming call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 327 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

328

Features

You can send numbers and names during a call. This is useful when calling a menu-

driven phone system.

■To send a number or name during a call

1. Say “Send.”

2. Say the number or name you want to send after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts.

You can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers in HFL. The numbers

you store can be account numbers or passwords. These numbers can be sent to a

menu-driven call.

■To store a phonebook entry

1. Say “Phonebook.”

2. Say “Store” after the prompts.

3. Say a name you want to list as your phonebook entry.

4. Say the number you want to store for the name entry.

5. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.

■To edit the number stored for a name

1. Say “Phonebook.”

2. Say “Edit” after the prompts.

3. Say a name you want to edit. When asked, say the new number for that name.

4. Follow the HFL prompts and say “Enter” to store the entry.

■Sending Numbers or Name During a Call

■HFL Phonebook

1Sending Numbers or Name During a Call

Press the button before a command.

To send a , say “Pound.” To send a , say “Star.”

1HFL Phonebook

•Avoid using duplicate name entries.

•Avoid using “home” as a name entry.

•It is easier for HFL to recognize a multisyllabic or

longer name. For example, use “Peter” instead of

“Pete,” or “John Smith” instead of “John.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 328 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

329

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a name

1. Say “Phonebook.”

2. Say “Delete” after the prompts.

3. Say a name you want to delete.

4. Say “Yes,” and follow the HFL prompts.

■To list all names in the phonebook

1. Say “Phonebook.”

2. Say “List” after the prompts.

3. HFL begins reading the names in the order they were stored.

4. When you hear a name you want to call, say “Call.”

■To store a specific phone number from your cell phone directly to the HFL

phonebook*

1. Say “Phonebook.”

2. Say “Receive Contact” after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts, select a number from your cell phone, and send it to HFL.

uIf it is not the number you want to store, say “Discard.”

4. Say the name for that number.

5. Follow the HFL prompts to continue.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 329 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

330

Features

This command group allows you to change or customize HFL basic settings.

■To set a four-digit passcode to lock the HFL system for security

1. Say “System Setup.”

2. Say “Security.”

3. Follow the HFL prompts and say the four-digit number of your choice.

4. Follow the HFL prompts and confirm the number.

■To change the security passcode

1. Say “System Setup.”

2. Say “Change Passcode” after the prompts.

3. Say the new four-digit passcode after the HFL prompts.

4. Follow the HFL prompts.

■To select a ring tone or a prompt as the incoming call notification

1. Say “System Setup.”

2. Say “Call Notification” after the prompts.

3. Say “Ring Tone” or “Prompt” after the prompts. For no audible notification, say

“Off.”

■System Setup

1System Setup

Press the button before a command.

Once a passcode is set, you are required to enter the

passcode with every new key cycle to use HFL.

If you forget the code, go to your dealer to have the

passcode reset. You can also cancel the passcode by

clearing all the data stored in the HFL system.

2To clear the system P. 331

The default setting of the incoming notification is a

ring tone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 330 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

331

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To activate or deactivate the auto transfer function

The call on your cell phone can be automatically transferred to HFL when you get

into the vehicle and turn on the ignition.

1. Say “System Setup.”

2. Say “Auto Transfer” after the prompts. HFL lets you know the current status.

3. Follow the HFL prompts to change the setting.

■To clear the system

Paired phones, all stored or imported phonebook data, and any passcodes are

erased.

1. Say “System Setup.”

2. Say “Clear” after the prompts.

3. Follow the HFL prompts.

You can set the system language to French or English.

1. Say “Change Language.”

2. Follow the HFL prompts.

If you have not named your paired phone in the selected language, HFL will ask you

to name it in that language.

■Change Language*

1System Setup

Press the button before a command.

You can clear the system when you have forgotten

the passcode and cannot access HFL.

When HFL asks you for the passcode, say “System

Clear.”

1Change Language*

Press the button before a command.

Quick Language Selection

If you want to change the language, to French for

example, say “Français,” and follow the prompt.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 331 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

332

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to

answer an incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook

name, or a number.

MENU/SEL (Selector) knob: Rotate to select an item on the audio/information

screen, then press .

To go to the Phone screen:

1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)

528 -7876.

To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag, a

phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and

naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models without navigation system

Models with touch screen

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up

Button

Volume down

DISP

Button

SEL

(Selector) Knob

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 332 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

333

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

Features

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or

inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until

the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers

can be called using voice commands while the

vehicle is in motion.

2Speed Dial P. 350

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

■Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level

Status

Roam Status

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Disabled Options

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 333 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

334

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w*1 to use HFL.

■Phone Settings screen

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Settings, then press

3. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

and the operation is canceled.

Pair a phone to the system.

Replace a previously paired phone with a

new phone.

Connect

Phone*2

Bluetooth

Device List

Add Bluetooth Device

Edit PIN

(Existing entry list)

Disconnect

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button

instead of an ignition switch.

(Existing

entry list)*2

Replace This

Device

Delete This

Device Delete a previously paired phone.

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.

Add

Bluetooth

Device

*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Pair a phone to the system.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 334 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

335

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

Select a phone number from the call

history to store as a speed dial number.

Manual Input

New Entry Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Enter a phone number to store as a

speed dial number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the

phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Edit Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

●Change a number.

●Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete Delete a previously stored speed dial

number.

(Existing

entry list)

Delete All

Edit Speed

Dial*1

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the

vehicle.

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four

seconds.

Select the ring tone.

Automatic Phone Sync*1

Use Contact Photo

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to

HFL.

Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Phone

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 335 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

336

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.

Select Account*Select a mail or text message account.

New Text/Email Alert

Message Auto Reading

Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL

receives a new text message/E-mail.

Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text

message/E-mail.

Text/Email*1

Default

Enable Text/Email

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 336 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

337

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■Phone screen

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

speed dial number.

Call

History*1

Speed Dial*1

All

Manual Input

Dialed

Received

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

New Entry

Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

Dial*1

Redial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 337 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

338

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

See the previous message.

Text/Email*1

Read/Stop

Select Account*

Previous Message

Next Message See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or

stop message from being read.

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Message is read

aloud.

Call

Reply to a received message using one of

six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Select a message

and press .

Select a mail or text message account.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 338 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 339

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

3. Make sure your phone is search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the

right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone

Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call

history and phonebook automatically imported to

HFL.

2Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting P. 349

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 339 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

340

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Connect Phone, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Add

Bluetooth Device.

3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, select

Phone Not Found and search for

Bluetooth devices using your phone.

From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 340 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 341

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To change the pairing code setting

1. Press the DISP button.

2. Rotate to select Settings, then press

3. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.

4. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

1To change the pairing code setting

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending

on your phone.

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the

setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the

current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you

pair a phone, select Random.

Edit Pairing Code

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 341 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

342

Features

■To replace an already-paired phone

with a new phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a paired phone you

want to replace, then press .

4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,

then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches

a new phone.

uFollow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial

entries, call history, and security PIN information from

the previously paired phone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 342 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

343

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a paired phone

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

delete, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if it is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 343 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

344

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail

function

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uRepeat the procedure to select Enable

Text/Email.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■To Set Up a Text Message/Email Options

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 344 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 345

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate to

select New Text/Email Alert, then press

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■To set up the auto reading option

1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email

screen, rotate to select Message Auto

Reading, then press .

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

2. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto then

press .

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you

receive a new message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system

without notification.

1To set up the auto reading option

On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.

Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.

Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when

driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 345 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

346

Features

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Bluetooth Device List,

then press .

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

add a security PIN to, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .

5. Enter a new four-digit number.

uRotate to select, then press .

Select to delete. Select OK to enter

the security PIN.

6. Re-enter the four-digit number.

uThe screen returns to the screen in step

■To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you

need to enter the current security PIN before clearing

the PIN or creating a new one.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 346 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

347

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

■Automatic Transferring

■Auto Answer

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 347 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

348

Features

You can change the ring tone setting.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Ring

Tone.

3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone

or Off, then press .

■Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.

Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the

connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.

Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 348 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 349

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its

phonebook and call history are automatically

imported to HFL.

■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Automatic Phone Sync.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Message

Voice

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 349 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

350

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Entry.

3. Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

From Import from Call History:

uSelect a number from the call history.

From Manual Input:

uInput the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

uSelect a number from the linked cell

phone’s imported phonebook.

4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the

number. Rotate to select Yes or No,

then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

■Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and

the voice tag name.

Mr.AAA

111AAA####

555EEE####

444DDD####

333CCC####

222BBB####

Mr.EEE

Mr.DDD

Mr.CCC

Mr.BBB

Select a method to store

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 350 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 351

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Record, then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For

example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 351 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

352

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To delete a voice tag

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Clear, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

■To delete a speed dial

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Phone, then press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Delete, then press .

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 352 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 353

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone

number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or

redial.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say “Call” and the voice tag

name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or

the phone number.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 353 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

354

Features

■To make a call using the imported

phonebook

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then

press .

3. Rotate to select a name, then press .

uYou can also search by letter. Rotate

to select Alphabet Search, then press

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number using voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 333

2Speed Dial P. 350

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 354 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 355

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

3. Rotate to select a number, then press

4. Rotate to select , then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using redial

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 333

2Speed Dial P. 350

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last

number dialed in your phone’s history.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 355 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

356

Features

■To make a call using the call history

Call history is stored by All, Dialed,

Received, and Missed.

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Call History, then

press .

3. Rotate to select All, Dialed, Received,

or Missed, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or

missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 356 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 357

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

3. Rotate to select a number, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Select More Speed Dials to view another paired

phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that

list using the currently connected phone.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag.

2Speed Dial P. 350

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 357 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

358

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming Call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call.

Press the button to decline or end the call.

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current

call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer

it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 358 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 359

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-

driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the lower

half of the screen.

Rotate to select the option, then press .

uThe mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

Mute Icon

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 359 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

360

Features

HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently

received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud

and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

HFL can also display E-mails.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text message or E-mail.

2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the

message, then press .

uThe text message or E-mail is displayed.

The system automatically starts reading

out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, press

■Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages

while you are driving. You can only hear them read

aloud.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to

20 most recent text messages and E-mails.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text

message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/

E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so

safely.

When you receive a text message or E-mail for the

first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are

asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to

On.

2To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

P. 345

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 360 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 361

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to

be active and receive notifications.

1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

2Phone Settings screen P. 334

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uRepeat the procedure to select Select

Account.

3. Rotate to select Text message or an

E-mail account you want, then press .

■Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list

screen or the message list screen.

Rotate to select Select Account on the top of the

list, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text

message or mail account at a time.

Message List

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 361 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

362

Features

■Displaying text messages

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uSelect account if necessary.

3. Rotate to select a message, then press

uThe text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

■Displaying Messages

1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is

also deleted in the system. If you send a message

from the system, the message goes to your phone’s

outbox.

To see the previous or next message, press on the

text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate

to select Previous Message or Next Message,

then press .

Message List

Text Message

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 362 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 363

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Displaying E-mails

1. Go to the Phone screen.

2Phone screen P. 337

2. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uSelect account if necessary.

3. Rotate to select a folder, then press .

4. Rotate to select a message, then press

uThe E-mail is displayed. The system

automatically starts reading the message

aloud.

1Displaying E-mails

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in

the message list screen at the same time. In this case,

text messages are titled No Subject.

Message List

E-mail

Folder List

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 363 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

364

Features

■Using the Stop or Read option

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 362

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Stop or Read, then

press .

1Using the Stop or Read option

This option changes to:

•Stop while the text message/E-mail is read out.

Select this option to discontinue the message read

out.

•Read when the system has finished reading out the

text message/E-mail, or after you selected Stop.

Select this option to hear the system read out the

selected message.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 364 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 365

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 362

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Reply, then press .

4. Rotate to select the reply message, then

press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

5. Select Send to send the message.

uComplete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

•Talk to you later, I’m driving.

•I’m on my way.

•I’m running late.

•OK

•Yes

•No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 365 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

366

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying text messages P. 362

2. Press to have the pop-up menu appear

on the screen.

3. Rotate to select Call, then press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 366 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

367

Continued

Features

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using

your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an

incoming call.

(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.

Interface dial: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,

, or to select secondary menu.

■HFL Buttons

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell

phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing

procedures, and special feature capabilities:

•U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call

(888) 528-7876.

•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)

528-7876.

To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Voice control tips

•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere

with the microphone.

•Press and release the button when you want to

call a number using a stored voice tag, a

phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and

naturally after a beep.

•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,

the command may be misinterpreted.

•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s

volume knob or the remote audio controls on the

steering wheel.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of

handheld electronic devices while operating a

vehicle.

Models with navigation system

Talk Button

Volume up

Microphone

Hang-up/Back Button

Pick-up

Button

Volume down

Interface Dial

PHONE

Button

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 367 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

368

Features

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Certain manual functions are disabled or

inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.

You cannot select a grayed-out option until

the vehicle is stopped.

Only previously stored speed dial entries with

voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers

can be called using voice commands while the

vehicle is in motion.

2Speed Dial P. 385

■HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any

use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is

under license. Other trademarks and trade names are

those of their respective owners.

HFL Limitations

An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio

system when it is playing. It will resume when the call

is ended.

1HFL Status Display

The information that appears on the audio/

information screen varies between phone models.

You can change the system language to English,

French, or Spanish.

2Customized Features* P. 281

■Limitations for Manual Operation

Bluetooth Indicator

Comes on when your

phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

HFL Mode

Battery Level

Status

Roam Status

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number

Disabled Option

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 368 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

369

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

HFL Menus

The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w*1 to use HFL.

■Phone Settings screen

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

1HFL Menus

To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-

compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle

is parked.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message

appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving

and the operation is canceled.

Edit the user name of a paired phone.

Phone

Edit Device

Name

Connect

phone*2

Bluetooth

Device List

(Existing

entry list)*2

Replace This

Device

Add Bluetooth

Device

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Connect a phone to the system.

Disconnect

(Existing entry list)

Pair a phone to the system.

Edit PIN

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.

Replace a previously paired phone with a

new phone.

Delete This

Device Delete a previously paired phone.

Add Bluetooth

Device Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 369 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

370

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Text/Email*1

Manual Input

Edit Speed

Dial*1 New Entry

Import from

Call History

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Import from

Phonebook

Delete All Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Select a phone number from the call

history to store as a speed dial number.

Select a phone number from the

phonebook to store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.

Edit

Delete

(Existing

entry list)

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

●Change a number.

●Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the

vehicle.

Auto Transfer

Auto Answer

Ring Tone

Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four

seconds.

Select the ring tone.

Use Contact Photo

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to

HFL.

Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Automatic Phone Sync

Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

Enable Text/Email Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.

New Text/Email Alert Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new

text message/E-mail.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Default

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 370 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

371

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■Phone screen

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button to display the

menu items.

Select a phone number from the call history to store as a

speed dial number.

Speed Dial*1

Manual Input

New Entry Import from

Call History

Import from

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a

speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.

More Speed Dials Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

Phonebook*1

Dial*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Enter a phone number to dial.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 371 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

372

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Text/Email*1

Message is

read aloud.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

See the previous message.

(Read/Stop)

Next See the next message.

System reads received message aloud, or stop message

from being read.

Call

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Make a call to the sender.

Select Account

Select a message

and press .

Select a mail or text message account.

Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

Call History*1

All

Dialed

Received

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 372 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when there is no

phone paired to the system)

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .

3. Make sure your phone is search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, move

to select Phone Not Found? and

search for Bluetooth devices using your

phone. From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

■Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to

HFL before you can make and receive hands-free

calls.

Phone Pairing Tips:

•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is

moving.

•Up to six phones can be paired.

•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is

paired to HFL.

•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found

by the system within three minutes, the system will

time out and returns to idle.

Once you have paired a phone, you can see it

displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the

right side.

These icons indicate the following:

: The phone can be used with HFL.

: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone

Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call

history and phonebook automatically imported to

HFL.

2Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting P. 384

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 373 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

374

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

already been paired to the system)

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Connect

Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device.

3. Make sure your phone is in search or

discoverable mode, then press .

uHFL automatically searches for a

Bluetooth device.

4. When your phone appears on the list, select

it by pressing .

uIf your phone does not appear, you can

select Refresh to search again.

uIf your phone still does not appear, move

to select Phone Not Found? and

search for Bluetooth devices using your

phone. From your phone, select

HandsFreeLink.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/

information screen.

uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen

and your phone match.

This may vary by phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 374 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 375

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To change the pairing code setting

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Pairing Code.

3. Rotate to select Fixed or Random,

then press .

1To change the pairing code setting

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending

on your phone.

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the

setting.

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the

current code, then enter a new one.

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you

pair a phone, select Random.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 375 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

376

Features

■To replace an already-paired phone

with a new phone

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a paired phone you

want to replace, then press .

4. Rotate to select Replace This Device,

then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches

a new phone.

uFollow the prompts to pair a new phone.

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if pairing is successful.

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone

The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial

entries, call history, and security PIN information from

the previously paired phone.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 376 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

377

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a paired phone

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

delete, then press .

4. Rotate to select Delete This Device,

then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen

if it is successful.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 377 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

378

Features

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail

function

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Enable

Text/Email.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Text/Email Alert.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you

receive a new text message.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system

without notification.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 378 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 379

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To set up the auto reading option

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Message

Auto Reading.

uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.

3. Rotate to select On, Off or Auto, then

press .

1To set up the auto reading option

On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.

Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.

Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when

driving.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 379 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

380

Features

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

add a security PIN to, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit PIN, then press .

5. Enter a new four-digit number.

uRotate to select, then press .

Move to delete. Rotate to select

OK to enter the security PIN.

6. Re-enter the four-digit number.

uThe screen returns to the screen in step

■To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN

If the phone is already security PIN protected, you

need to enter the current security PIN before clearing

the PIN or creating a new one.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 380 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

381

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

Edit the user name of a paired phone as

follows:

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Bluetooth Device List.

3. Rotate to select a phone you want to

edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Edit Device Name,

then press .

5. Enter a new name of the phone.

uRotate to select, then press .

Move to delete. Rotate or move

to select OK then press to enter the

name.

■Editing User Name

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 381 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

382

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically

transferred to HFL.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Transfer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Auto

Answer.

3. Rotate to select On, then press .

■Automatic Transferring

■Auto Answer

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 382 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

You can change the ring tone setting.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Ring

Tone.

3. Rotate to select Fixed, Mobile Phone

or Off, then press .

■Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.

Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the

connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.

Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 383 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

384

Features

■When Automatic Phone Sync is set to

On:

When your phone is paired, the contents of its

phonebook and call history are automatically

imported to HFL.

■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

setting

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select

Automatic Phone Sync.

3. Rotate to select On or Off, then press

■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

When you select a person from the list in the cellular

phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.

The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored

for that name.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the

category icons to HFL.

The phonebook is updated after every connection.

Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Pref

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Other

Message

Voice

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 384 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.

To store a speed dial number:

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

uRepeat the procedure to select New

Entry.

4. Rotate to select a place to choose a

number from, then press .

From Import from Call History:

uSelect a number from the call history.

From Manual Input:

uInput the number manually.

From Import from Phonebook:

uSelect a number from the linked cell

phone’s imported phonebook.

5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,

you are asked to create a voice tag for the

number. Rotate to select Yes or No,

then press .

6. Using the button, follow the prompts to

store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

■Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and

the voice tag name.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 385 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

386

Features

■To add a voice tag to a stored speed

dial number

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Record, then press .

5. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For

example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 386 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

387

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Edit, then press .

4. Rotate to select Voice Tag, then press

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Clear, then press .

5. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

■To delete a speed dial

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Edit

Speed Dial.

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.

uFrom the pop-up menu, rotate to

select Delete, then press .

4. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 387 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

388

Features

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that

it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.

■To add a new voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

add phonetic modification to, then press

■Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By

Voice is set to Off.

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 388 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

389

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

5. Rotate to select New Voice Tag, then

press .

6. Move or and rotate to select a

contact name, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

7. Rotate to select Modify, then press .

8. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

9. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select OK, then

press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 389 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

390

Features

■To modify a voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

add phonetic modification to, then press

5. Rotate to select a contact name you

want to modify, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Modify, then press .

7. Using the button, follow the prompts to

complete the voice tag.

8. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select OK, then

press .

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

You cannot modify or delete a contact name if it is

edited with a phone other than the phone connected

to HFL.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 390 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

391

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Continued

Features

■To delete a modified voice tag

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

delete phonetic modification, then press

5. Rotate to select a contact name you

want to delete, then press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Rotate to select Delete, then press .

7. Move and rotate to select OK, then

press .

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 391 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

392

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To delete all modified voice tags

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select System Settings, then

press .

3. Rotate to select Phonebook Phonetic

Modification, then press .

4. Rotate to select the phone you want to

delete phonetic modification, then press

uThe contact name list appears.

5. Move and rotate to select Delete All,

then press .

6. You will receive a confirmation message on

the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then

press .

Connect phone

Phone#2

Phone#1

Phone#3

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 392 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 393

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

You can make calls by inputting any phone

number, or by using the imported

phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or

redial.

■Making a Call

1Making a Call

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,

or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.

Press the button and say “Call” and the voice tag

name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or

the phone number.

The maximum range between your phone and

vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of

the person you are calling through the audio

speakers.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 393 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

394

Features

■To make a call using the imported

phonebook

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Phonebook, then

press .

4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.

Move to Search.

5. Rotate to select a number, then press

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 368

2Speed Dial P. 385

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 394 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 395

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■To make a call using a phone number

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Dial, then press .

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

5. Rotate to select , then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using redial

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Redial, then press .

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.

However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed

dial number, phonebook name, or number using

voice commands.

2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 368

2Speed Dial P. 385

1To make a call using redial

Press and hold the button to redial the last

number dialed in your phone’s history.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 395 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

396

Features

■To make a call using the call history

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Call History, then

press .

4. Move or to select All, Dialed,

Received, and Missed.

5. Rotate to select a number, then press

uDialing starts automatically.

■To make a call using a speed dial entry

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press

4. Rotate to select a number, then press

uDialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history

The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or

missed calls.

(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

These icons next to the number indicate the

following:

: Dialed calls.

: Received calls.

: Missed calls.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Move to select More Speed Dials to view another

paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call

from that list using the currently connected phone.

When a voice tag is stored, press the button to

call the number using the voice tag.

2Speed Dial P. 385

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name

or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.

Press the button and follow the prompts.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 396 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 397

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

When there is an incoming call, an audible

notification sounds (if activated) and the

Incoming call screen appears.

Press the button to answer the call.

Press the button to decline or end the call.

■Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

Call Waiting

Press the button to put the current call on hold to

answer the incoming call.

Press the button again to return to the current

call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer

it.

Press the button if you want to hang up the

current call.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 397 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

398

Features

The following options are available during a call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-

driven phone system.

The available options are shown on the Phone

screen.

Rotate to select the option, then press .

uThe mute icon appears when Mute is

selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

■Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

Mute Icon

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 398 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 399

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

HFL can display newly received text messages and E-mails as well as 20 of the most

recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be

read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new

text message or E-mail.

2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the

message, then press .

uThe text message or E-mail is displayed.

The system automatically starts reading

out the message.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, press

■Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

The system does not display any received messages

while you are driving. You can only hear them read

aloud.

With some phones, you may be able to display up to

20 most recent text messages and E-mails.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text

message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/

E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so

safely.

When you receive a text message or E-mail for the

first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are

asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to

On.

2To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

P. 378

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 399 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

400

Features

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to

be active and receive notifications.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

2. Rotate to select Phone Settings, then

press .

uRepeat the procedure to select Select

Account.

3. Rotate to select Text message or an E-

mail account you want, then press .

■Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

You can also select a mail account from the folder list

screen or the message list screen.

Move to select Select Account, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text

message or mail account at a time.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 400 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 401

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Displaying text messages

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

uSelect account if necessary.

4. Rotate to select a message, then press

uThe text message is displayed. The

system automatically starts reading the

message aloud.

■Displaying Messages

1Displaying Messages

The icon appears next to an unread message.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is

also deleted in the system. If you send a message

from the system, the message goes to your phone’s

outbox.

To see the previous or next message, move or

on the text message screen.

Message List

Text Message

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 401 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

402

Features

■Displaying E-mails

1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Press the MENU button.

3. Rotate to select Text/Email, then press

4. Rotate to select a folder, then press .

5. Rotate to select a message, then press

uThe E-mail is displayed. The system

automatically starts reading the message

aloud.

1Displaying E-mails

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in

the message list screen at the same time. In this case,

text messages are titled No subject.

Folder List

Message List

E-mail

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 402 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 403

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Read or stop reading a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 401

2. Press to stop reading.

Press again to start reading the message

from the beginning.

■Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying Messages P. 401

2. Move and rotate to select Reply,

then press .

3. Rotate to select the reply message, then

press .

uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.

4. Select Send to send the message.

uComplete appears on the screen when

the reply message was successfully sent.

1Reply to a message

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

•Talk to you later, I’m driving.

•I’m on my way.

•I’m running late.

•OK

•Yes

•No

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 403 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

404

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

■Making a call to a sender

1. Go to the text message screen.

uThe system automatically starts reading

the message aloud.

2Displaying text messages P. 401

2. Move and rotate to select Call, then

press .

John 0123456789####

Reply Call

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 404 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

405

Features

Compass*

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w, the compass self-calibrates, and the

compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need

to manually calibrate the system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press and hold the MENU button until the

display shows the compass setting menu

list.

3. Rotate to select CALIBRATION, then

press .

4. When the display changes to PUSH CAL

START, press .

5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.

uThe compass starts to show a direction

after the calibration. The CAL indicator

goes off.

1Compass*

Compass operation can be affected under the

following conditions:

•Driving near power lines or stations

•Crossing a bridge

•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large

object that can cause a magnetic disturbance

•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks

are mounted by magnets

Canadian models

Models without audio touch screen

1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area.

While setting the compass:

•The RETURN button returns to the previous screen.

•The MENU button cancels the setting mode.

These indications are used to show how to operate

the selector knob.

Rotate to select.

Press to enter.

Compass Setting Menu Items

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 405 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

406

uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Features

Compass Zone Selection

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w.

2. Press and hold the MENU button until the

display shows the compass setting menu

list.

3. Rotate to select ZONE, then press .

The display shows the current zone

number.

4. Rotate to select the zone number of

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

1Compass Zone Selection

The zone selection is done to compensate the

variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in

use, the display returns to normal after the calibration

is completed.

Zone Number

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 406 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

407

Features

Compass*

When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, the compass self-calibrates, and the

compass display appears.

Compass Calibration

If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need

to manually calibrate the system.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for 5 seconds.

uThe display switches to the Compass

Settings screen.

3. Rotate to select Calibration, then press

4. When the display changes to Calibration

Start, press .

5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.

uThe compass starts to show a direction

after the calibration. The CAL indicator

goes off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Models with audio touch screen

1Compass*

Compass operation can be affected under the

following conditions:

•Driving near power lines or stations

•Crossing a bridge

•Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large

object that can cause a magnetic disturbance

•When accessories such as antennas and roof racks

are mounted by magnets

1Compass Calibration

Calibrate the compass in an open area.

While setting the compass, press the BACK button to

cancel the setting mode and return to the previous

screen.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 407 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

408

uuCompass*uCompass Zone Selection

Features

Compass Zone Selection

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. On the top screen of any audio source,

press and hold for 5 seconds.

uThe display switches to the Compass

Settings screen.

3. Rotate to select Zone Adjust, then

press .

uThe display shows the current zone

number.

4. Rotate to select the zone number of

your area (See Zone Map), then press .

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Zone Map

Guam Island: Zone 8

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

1Compass Zone Selection

The zone selection is done to compensate the

variation between magnetic north and true north.

If the calibration starts while the audio system is in

use, the display returns to normal after the calibration

is completed.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 408 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

409

Driving

This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving

Driving Preparation .......................... 410

Maximum Load Limit........................ 413

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation.......................... 415

Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 418

Towing Your Vehicle........................ 419

When Driving

Starting the Engine .......................... 420

Precautions While Driving................. 424

Automatic Transmission ................... 425

Shifting............................................ 426

Cruise Control ................................. 432

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*.. 435

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*..... 439

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC

(Electronic Stability Control), System..442

LaneWatchTM*.................................. 444

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System).. 446

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -

Required Federal Explanation ......... 447

Braking

Brake System ................................... 449

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 451

Brake Assist System ......................... 452

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped ................................ 453

Rearview Camera ............................. 454

Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 455

Refueling

Fuel Information .............................. 456

How to Refuel ................................. 457

Fuel Economy.................................... 459

Improving Fuel Economy.................. 459

Accessories and Modifications ........ 460

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 409 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

410

Driving

Before Driving

Driving Preparation

Check the following items before you start driving.

•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior

lights, or other parts of the vehicle.

uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.

uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of

vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.

uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel

or wheel components.

•Make sure the hood is securely closed.

uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

•Make sure the tires are in good condition.

uCheck air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497

•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.

uThere are blind spots from the inside.

■Exterior Checks

1Exterior Checks

NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around

the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force

them open, as this can damage the rubber trim

around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid

further freezing.

Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.

You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in

the hole.

Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite

flammable materials left under the hood, causing a

fire. If you’ve parked your vehicle for an extended

period, inspect and remove any debris that may have

collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have

fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a

small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover

flammable materials after you or someone else has

performed maintenance on your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 410 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 411

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

•Store or secure all items on board properly.

uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s

handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

2Maximum Load Limit P. 413

•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.

uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden

braking.

•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor

mat.

uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator

pedal operation while driving.

•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.

uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.

•Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.

2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 99

•Adjust your seating position properly.

uAdjust the head restraint, too.

2Adjusting the Seats P. 133

2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 136

•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.

uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.

2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 129

2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 130

■Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 411 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

412

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Driving

•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the

seats.

uThey can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation

of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.

•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.

2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35

•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the

vehicle, and go off soon after.

uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.

2Indicators P. 70

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 412 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

413

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Continued

Driving

Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).

See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and

accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount

equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650 lbs.

(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

1Maximum Load Limit

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue

load.

2Specifications P. 546, 548

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):

The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.

2Specifications P. 546, 548

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading

can affect handling and stability

and cause a crash in which you

can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other

loading guidelines in this manual.

Label Example

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 413 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

414

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Driving

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage

load capacity of your vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs

(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

550 lbs

(249 kg)

Example2

Max Load

850 lbs

(385 kg)

Passenger Weight

150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs

(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

100 lbs

(45 kg)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 414 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

415

Continued

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Towing Preparation

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper

equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

■Total trailer weight

Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,

cargo, and everything in or on it must not

exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for 6-cylinder

models and 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for 4-cylinder

models. Towing loads in excess of this can

seriously affect vehicle handling and

performance and can damage the engine and

drivetrain.

■Tongue load

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded

trailer on the hitch should be approximately

10% of the total trailer weight.

•Excessive tongue load reduces front tire

traction and steering control. Too little

tongue load can make the trailer unstable

and cause it to sway.

•To achieve a proper tongue load, start by

loading 60% of the load toward the front

of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.

Readjust the load as needed.

■Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.

If a public scale is not available, add the estimated

weight of your cargo load to the weight of your

trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the

tongue load.

Break-in Period

Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle’s first 600

miles (1,000 km).

Never exceed the gross weight ratings.

Gross weight information

2Vehicle Specifications P. 546, 548

WARNING

Exceeding any load limit or improperly

loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a

crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and

trailer carefully before starting to drive.

Total Load

Tongue Load

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 415 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

416

Driving

Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,

and where you are towing.

■Hitches

The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■Safety chains

Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the

trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■Trailer brakes

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are

common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,

be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to

your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a

potential hazard.

■Additional towing equipment

Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a

trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special

mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■Towing Equipment and Accessories

1Towing Equipment and Accessories

Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and

maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/

territory, and local regulations.

Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other

items are recommended or required for your towing

situation.

The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type

and brand. If a connector is required, it should only

be installed by a qualified technician.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 416 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

417

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

Driving

■Trailer light

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and

local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the

requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

Your trailer lighting connector is located behind the left side panel in the cargo area.

Each pin’s purpose and wiring color code are shown in the image.

When using a non-Honda trailer lighting harness and converter, get the connector

and pins for your vehicle from a dealer.

Right Turn Signal (Green)

Ground (Black) Left Turn Signal (Blue)

Taillight (Red)

Brake Light (Light Green)Trailer (Yellow)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 417 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

418

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

Driving

Driving Safely with a Trailer

•Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.

•Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

2Towing Load Limits P. 415

•Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.

•Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while

driving.

•Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.

•Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

•Drive slower than normal.

•Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.

•Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.

•Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.

•Allow more time and distance for braking.

•Do not brake or turn suddenly.

■Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

■Towing Speeds and Gears

■Turning and Braking

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

Parking

In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel

chocks at each of the trailer’s tires.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 418 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

419

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

Driving

•Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the

heating and cooling system*/climate control system* and reduce speed. Pull to the

side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.

•Shift to the (S or (d position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs

to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.

2Emergency Towing P. 542

■Driving in Hilly Terrain

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 419 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

420

Driving

When Driving

Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then

depress the brake pedal.

uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

Models without smart entry system

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and

cooling system */climate control system*, and rear

defogger in order to reduce battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently

below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

mixture should be charged to a higher concentration

to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

Brake Pedal

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 420 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

421

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that

the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2Parking Brake P. 449

2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

■Starting to Drive

1Starting the Engine

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15

seconds.

•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at

least 10 seconds before trying again.

•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,

wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3

while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.

Release the accelerator pedal once the engine

starts.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is

used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

2Immobilizer System P. 107

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 421 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

422

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P, then

depress the brake pedal.

uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle

in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

Models with smart entry system

1Starting the Engine

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when

starting the engine.

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in

thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400

meters).

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all

electrical accessories such as the lights, climate

control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce

battery drain.

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,

an engine block heater will improve starting and

warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently

below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant

mixture should be changed to a higher concentration

to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can

smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle

checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with

the engine or exhaust system.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from

theft.

If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s

fuel system is disabled.

2Immobilizer System P. 107

Brake Pedal

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 422 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

423

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Driving

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button

without depressing the accelerator pedal.

You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.

1. Shift to (P.

2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that

the parking brake indicator has gone off.

2Parking Brake P. 449

2. Put the shift lever in (D. Select (R when reversing.

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull

away.

■Stopping the Engine

■Starting to Drive

1Starting the Engine

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE

START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry

remote is weak.

2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

P. 526

The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is

subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to

start the engine.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds

before trying again.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 423 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

424

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Driving

Precautions While Driving

Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or

driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.

Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■In Rain

■Other Precautions

1Precautions While Driving

NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the

accelerator pedal. You could damage the

transmission.

If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or

LOCK (0*1 while driving, the engine will shut down

and all steering and brake power assist functions will

stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.

Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose

engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,

avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so

as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

You should also follow this when the brake pads are

replaced.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 424 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

425

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission

Driving

Automatic Transmission

The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.

Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the

transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress

the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

■Creeping

■Kickdown

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 425 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

426

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■Shift lever positions

Automatic transmission models without paddle shifters

1Shifting

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and

remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in

(N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,

apply the parking brake.

The engine may cut in and out in (R or depending on

the road condition, even when the engine speed is

lower than the tachometer’s red zone. This is the

engine’s computer working to protect the

transmission.

Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Used when idling

Drive

Used for normal driving (gears change

between 1st and 5th automatically)

Drive (D3)

Used:

●When going up or down hills

●When towing a trailer in hilly terrain

Second

Used to increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 2nd gear)

First

Used to further increase engine braking

(the transmission is locked in 1st gear)

Release Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 426 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

427

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

■Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and

vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,

a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission

problem.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine

speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine

speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a

slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Tachometer’s red zone

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press

the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 427 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

428

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

■Shift lever positions

Automatic transmission models with paddle shifters

1Shifting

You cannot change the power mode from ON to

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in

(N while the engine is cold.

Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,

apply the parking brake.

The engine may cut in and out in (R or depending on

the road condition, even when the engine speed is

lower than the tachometer’s red zone. This is the

engine’s computer working to protect the

transmission.

Park

Used when parking or starting the

engine

Reverse

Used when reversing

Neutral

Used when idling

Drive

Used:

●For normal driving (gears change

between 1st and 6th automatically)

●When temporarily driving in the

sequential mode

Release Button

Drive (S)

Used:

●When automatically changing gears

between 1st and 5th (5th gear is used

only at high speed)

●When driving in the sequential mode

●When towing a trailer in hilly terrain

●To increase engine braking

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 428 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 429

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

■Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and

vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the

brake pedal depressed.

Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come

to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the

lever position before pulling away.

Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,

a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission

problem.

Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission

checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine

speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine

speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a

slight jolt.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the

brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release

button is held down.

Depress the brake pedal first.

Tachometer’s red zone

M (Sequential Shift mode)

Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

Depress the brake pedal and press

the shift lever release button to shift.

Shift without pressing the shift lever

release button.

Press the shift lever release button

and shift.

Shift Lever Position Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 429 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

430

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your

hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift

mode.

■When the shift lever is in (D:

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position

indicator will come on.

Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will

automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.

Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

■Sequential Shift Mode

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 430 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

■When the shift lever is in (S:

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode)

indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or

less, the vehicle automatically shifts down into 1st gear. If you do not operate the

You can only pull away in 1st or 2nd gear.

When switching out of the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to

(D. When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position

indicator go off.

paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission automatically shifts up to 2nd gear.

Once in 2nd gear, the transmission must be manually upshifted to the remaining

gears using the [+] paddle shifter.

431

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Driving

■Second gear lock mode

If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,

the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on

slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.

To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever

from (S to (D.

■Sequential Shift Mode Operation

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation

Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear

change.

To change gears continuously, release the paddle

shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Recommended Shift Points

Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel

economy and effective emission control.

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot

shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed

is not in its allowable gear shifting range.

Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift

down while the indicator is blinking.

Shift Up Normal Acceleration

1st to 2nd 17.4 mph (28.0 km/h)

2nd to 3rd 27.1 mph (43.6 km/h)

3rd to 4th 35.7 mph (57.5 km/h)

4th to 5th 41.0 mph (66.0 km/h)

5th to 6th 44.2 mph (71.1 km/h)

Paddle Shifter

(Shift down)

Paddle Shifter

(Shift up)

Downshifting when pulling

the (- paddle shifter.

Upshifting when pulling

the (+ paddle shifter.

(-(+

(Changes to a lower gear.) (Changes to a higher gear.)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 431 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

432

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Driving

Cruise Control

Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the

accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a

constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

1Cruise Control

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed

when driving uphill or downhill.

When not using cruise control:

Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE

button.

WARNING

Improper use of the cruise control can lead

to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling

on open highways in good weather.

■Shift positions for cruise control:

In (D or (d

In (D or (S

Models without paddle shifters

Models with paddle shifters

When to use

Always keep sufficient distance

between you and the vehicle in

front of you.

■Vehicle speed for cruise control:

Desired speed in a range above

roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the

instrument panel.

Cruise control is ready to use.

■Press the CRUISE button on

the steering wheel.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 432 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

433

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

Continued

Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired

speed.

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control

begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

■To Set the Vehicle Speed

–/SET Button

On when cruise control begins

Press and release

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 433 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

434

Driving

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the

steering wheel.

•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you

release it. This speed is then set.

To cancel cruise control, do any of the

following:

•Press the CANCEL button.

•Press the CRUISE button.

•Depress the brake pedal.

The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button

on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with

the accelerator and brake pedals.

■To Cancel

To decrease speed

To increase speed

1To Cancel

Resuming the prior set speed:

After cruise control has been canceled, you can still

resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+

button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40

km/h) or more.

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:

•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)

•When the CRUISE button is turned off

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise

control is canceled automatically.

CRUISE

Button

CANCEL

Button

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 434 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

435

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Continued

Driving

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in

front of yours.

If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.

uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,

etc.).

■How the system works

The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is

above 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Important Safety Reminder

FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not

detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary

based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW

does not include a braking function. It is always your

responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid

collisions.

You can change the Forward Collision Warning

Distance setting or turn the system on and off.

2Customized Features* P. 281

For the FCW system to work properly:

The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning

(LDW).

2LDW Camera P. 440

LONG

NORMAL

SHORT

Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead

You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 435 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*

436

Driving

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s

field of vision.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making

even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision

or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield

may also cause the system to operate abnormally.

After replacing the windshield, have a dealer

recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW

camera is necessary for the system to operate

properly.

Beep

Camera-based system

The camera is located

behind the rearview mirror.

The beeper sounds and

the FCW indicator blinks

until a possible collision

is avoided.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 436 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 437

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Driving

■Automatic shutoff

FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on

when:

•The temperature inside the system is high.

•The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,

cleaning), the system comes back on.

1Automatic shutoff

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera system to shut

off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front

of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a

reflective sunshade that can concentrate heat on the

camera.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:

•Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when

windows are fogged.

•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the FCW system.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 437 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

438

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*

Driving

FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead

of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.

■FCW Limitations

Condition

●The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.

●A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.

●A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.

●When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.

●The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.

●When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly

detect a vehicle in front of you.

●When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.

●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).

●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.

●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

●When the temperature inside the system is high.

●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).

●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.

●When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.

●When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.

●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

●When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 438 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

439

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*

Continued

Driving

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally

crossing over left or right side lane markings.

If your vehicle is getting too close to detected

left or right side lane markings without a turn

signal activated, LDW will give audible and

visual alerts.

The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator

blinks, letting you know that you need to take

appropriate action.

■How the System Works

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.

Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is

always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within

your driving lane.

LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected

without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all

lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary

based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.

It is always your responsibility to safely operate the

vehicle and avoid collisions.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 439 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*

440

Driving

The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:

•The vehicle is traveling between at 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).

•The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.

•The turn signals are off.

•The brake pedal is not pressed.

The camera is located behind the rearview

mirror.

Press the LDW button to turn the system on

and off.

uThe indicator in the button comes on

when the system is on.

■How the System Activates

■LDW Camera

1How the System Activates

LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW

indicator comes and stays on.

2Indicators P. 77

1LDW Camera

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the

windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s

field of vision.

Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield

within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the

system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we

recommend that you replace the windshield with a

genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making

even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision

or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield

may also cause the system to operate abnormally.

After replacing the windshield, have a dealer

recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW

camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior

temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,

when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the

vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a reflective

sunshade that can concentrate heat on the camera.

If the CAMERA HOT message appears:

•Use the climate control system to cool down the

interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when

windows are fogged.

•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield

temperature, which cools down the area around

the LDW system.

LDW Camera

■LDW On and Off

LDW Button

Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 440 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

441

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*

Driving

LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when

keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.

■LDW Limitations

Condition

●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).

●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.

●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

●When the temperature inside the system is high.

●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).

●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.

●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

●When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

●When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.

uThe camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.

●When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.

●When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.

●When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.

●When you drive in a lane with specific lane markups (e.g., Botts’ dots).

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 441 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

442

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

Driving

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic

Stability Control), System

VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less

than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.

It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the

engine does not respond to the accelerator.

You may also notice some noise from the

hydraulic system. You will also see the

indicator blink.

■VSA® Operation

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and

size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and

type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.

When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on

while driving, there may be a problem with the

system. While this may not interfere with normal

driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer

immediately.

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations

and does not control the entire braking system. You

still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate

for the conditions and always leave a sufficient

margin of safety.

The main function of the VSA® system is generally

known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The

system also includes a traction control function.

VSA® System Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 442 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

443

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

Driving

This button is on the driver side control panel.

To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and

hold it until you hear a beep.

VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.

To turn it on again, press the (VSA® OFF)

button until you hear a beep.

VSA® is turned on every time you start the

engine, even if you turned it off the last time

you drove the vehicle.

■VSA® On and Off

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), System

Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking

and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®

traction and stability enhancement.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets

stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier

to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.

When the VSA® system is off, the traction control

system is also off. You should only attempt to free

your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to

free it when the VSA® is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to

switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving

your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control

systems switched off.

If the low tire pressure, or TPMS indicator comes on

or blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In

this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing

the button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

VSA® OFF Indicator

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 443 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

444

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

Driving

LaneWatchTM*

Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas

displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the

passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas

and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the

passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while

driving.

1LaneWatchTM*

Important Safety Reminder

Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has

limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in

a collision.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,

lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),

ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique

lens makes objects on the screen slightly look

different from what they are.

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift

lever is in (R.

WARNING

Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to

change lanes before doing so may result in

a crash and serious injury or death.

Do not rely only on LaneWatch while

driving.

Always look in your mirrors, to either side

of your vehicle, and behind you for other

vehicles before changing lanes.

Camera

Audio/Information Screen

Move the turn signal

lever to the passenger

side.

Press the LaneWatch

button.

Pull the turn signal

lever back.

Press the LaneWatch

button again.

The passenger side view

display appears on the

audio/information screen.

The system activates when you:

The system deactivates when you:

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 444 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

445

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

Driving

■Customizing the LaneWatch settings

You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.

•Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when

you operate the turn signal light lever.

•Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch

monitor.

•Next Maneuver Pop up*: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the

navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.

•Display: Adjusts display settings.

2Customized Features* P. 281

■Reference Lines

Three lines that appear on the screen can give

an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on

the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.

If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates

that it is close to your vehicle whereas an

object near line 3 farther away.

1LaneWatchTM*

For a proper LaneWatch use:

•The camera is located in the passenger side door

mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera

lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,

moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of

debris.

•Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers

of any kind.

•Do not touch the camera lens.

1Reference Lines

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close

to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually

confirm the safety of a lane change before changing

lanes.

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and

3 on the screen vary depending on road condition

and vehicle loading. For example, reference lines on

the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual

distances when the rear of your vehicle is more

heavily loaded.

Consult a dealer if:

•The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

severely impacted, resulting in changing the

camera angle.

•The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 445 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

446

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Driving

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Monitors the tire pressure while you are

driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes

significantly low, the low tire pressure

indicator comes on.

1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and

altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can

trigger the low tire pressure indicator to come on.

2If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes

On P. 537

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:

•Warm weather can become under-inflated in

colder weather.

•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer

weather.

The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a

result of over inflation.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 446 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

447

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Continued

Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required

Federal Explanation

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked

monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure

recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated

on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low

tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s

handling and stopping ability.

U.S. models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 447 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

448

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Driving

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction

indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is provided by a separate telltale,

which displays the symbol “TPMS” when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,

the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as

intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including

the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 448 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

449

Continued

Driving

Braking

Brake System

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.

To apply:

Pull the lever fully up without pressing the

release button.

To release:

1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold

the release button.

2. Lower the lever down all the way, then

release the button.

■Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The

rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive

with the parking brake applied.

If you start driving without fully releasing the parking

brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.

Always apply the parking brake when parking.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 449 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuBrakinguBrake System

450

Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist

helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases

the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency

situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when

braking very hard.

2Brake Assist System P. 452

2ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 451

■Foot Brake

1Foot Brake

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,

or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If

necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the

pedal several times.

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when

applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be

replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a

long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake

effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your

foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a

lower gear.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause

them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad

life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 450 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

451

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Driving

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by

pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also

balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always

keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as

“stomp and steer.”

■ABS operation

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the

pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very

hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately

if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

■ABS

1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an

incorrect tire type and size.

When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,

there may be a problem with the system.

While normal braking is not affected, there is a

possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle

checked by a dealer immediately.

The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes

to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control

during hard braking.

In the following cases, your vehicle may need more

stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:

•When driving on rough road surfaces, including

when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow.

•When tire chains are installed.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the

engine compartment while system checks are being

performed immediately after starting the engine or

while driving. This is normal.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 451 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

452

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Driving

Brake Assist System

Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress

the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■Brake assist system operation

Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.

When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise

may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 452 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

453

Driving

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped

1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.

4. Turn off the engine.

Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

1Parking Your Vehicle

Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,

such as dry grass, oil, or timber.

Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

1When Stopped

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:

•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals

simultaneously.

•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by

depressing the accelerator pedal.

•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle

stops completely.

Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 453 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

454

Driving

Rearview Camera

About Your Rearview Camera

An image of the rear view is shown in your vehicle’s rearview mirror when the shift

lever is moved to (R.

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further

than they actually are.

■Rearview Camera Display Area

1About Your Rearview Camera

The rear camera view is restricted.

You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper and

what is underneath the bumper.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive on before

backing up. Do not rely on the rearview display,

which does not give you complete information.

Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view.

Use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

You can select to have the guide lines appearing on

the rearview camera display while the shift lever is in

(R. Press the Auto button for about five seconds to

turn them on or off.

The rearview display is turned on every time you shift

to (R.

The rearview mirror gets hot if the rearview display is

used for an extended period.

Rearview Camera

Display

Sensor:

Adjusts

the display

brightness.

Auto Button

Models without touch screen

Screen display

Camera

Approx. 7.8 in (0.2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Bumper

Guide lines

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 454 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

455

Driving

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display

automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R.

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the

MENU/SEL (Selector) knob or the interface dial to switch the angle.

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next

time you shift into (R. If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.

■Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Models with touch screen

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see

the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath

the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects

appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing

up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and

high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do

not rely on the rearview display which does not give

you all information about conditions at the back of

your vehicle.

If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,

use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free

of debris.

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic

Guideline settings.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Fixed Guideline

On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R.

Off: Guidelines do not appear.

Dynamic Guideline

On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel

direction.

Off: Guidelines do not move.

Top Down View Mode

Normal View Mode

Wide View Mode

Guidelines

Bumper

Camera

Approx. 118 in (3 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)

Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 20 in (50 cm)

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 455 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

456

Driving

Refueling

Fuel Information

■Fuel recommendation

Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise

that can lead to engine damage.

■Top tier detergent gasoline

Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda

endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help

maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive

manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met

“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is

guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic

additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic

additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission

control system.

For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on

gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit

www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top

tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■Fuel tank capacity: 18.5 US gal (70 liters)

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

1Fuel Information

NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing

detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and

engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain

good performance, fuel economy, and emissions

control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline

that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based

fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is

available.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely

affect performance, and cause the malfunction

indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.

If this happens, contact a dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such

as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on

oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol

by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try

another service station or switch to another brand of

gasoline.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 456 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

457

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

Continued

Driving

How to Refuel

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2. Turn off the engine.

3. Unlock the driver’s door using the lock tab

or the master door lock switch.

uThe fuel fill door on the outer side of the

vehicle will unlock.

4. Press the area indicated by the arrow to

release the fuel fill door. You will hear a

click.

1How to Refuel

Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to

unlock the fuel fill door.

The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically

relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can

be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the

driver’s door.

NOTICE

The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be

permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced

closed when the driver’s door is locked.

WARNING

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.

You can be burned or seriously injured

when handling fuel.

•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,

and flame away.

•Handle fuel only outdoors.

•Wipe up spills immediately.

Press Fuel Fill Door

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 457 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

458

Driving

5. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a

release of air, wait until this stops, then turn

the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

6. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.

7. Insert the filler nozzle fully.

uWhen the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will

click off automatically. This leaves space

in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands

with a change in the temperature.

8. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,

tightening it until you hear it click at least

once.

uShut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel

The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in

the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result

of changes in air temperature.

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is

not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel

vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If

this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has

automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed

the full tank capacity.

Cap

Holder

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 458 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

459

Driving

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your

driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and

other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the

information display.

•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.

•Maintain the specified tire pressure.

•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.

•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside

adds weight and increases wind resistance.

■Maintenance and Fuel Economy

1Improving Fuel Economy

Direct calculation is the recommended method to

determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are

established following a simulated test. For more

information on how this test is performed, please visit

http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Miles driven Gallons of

fuel

Miles per

Gallon

100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 459 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

460

Driving

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

When installing accessories, check the following:

•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and

delay your reaction to driving conditions.

2Forward Collision Warning (FCW)* P. 435

2Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* P. 439

•Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.

Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the

side curtain airbags.

•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with

proper operation of your vehicle.

2Fuses P. 538

•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for

assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

Modifications

Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its

handling, stability, and reliability.

Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is

properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,

territory, and local regulations.

1Accessories and Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to

ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

WARNING

Improper accessories or modifications can

affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and

performance, and cause a crash in which

you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding accessories and

modifications.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 460 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

461

Maintenance

This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance ............ 462

Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 463

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance

Service ........................................... 464

Maintenance Minder™ .................... 465

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 469

Opening the Hood ........................... 471

Recommended Engine Oil ................ 472

Oil Check......................................... 473

Adding Engine Oil............................ 475

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ....476

Engine Coolant................................ 478

Transmission Fluid............................ 480

Brake Fluid....................................... 481

Power Steering Fluid Check*............ 482

Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 483

Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 484

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

... 493

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires ................................. 497

Tire and Loading Information Label...... 498

Tire Labeling .................................... 498

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......500

Wear Indicators................................ 502

Tire Service Life................................ 502

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 503

Tire Rotation.................................... 504

Winter Tires ..................................... 505

Battery............................................... 506

Remote Transmitter Care................. 507

Replacing the Button Battery ........... 507

Heating and Cooling System*/Climate

Control System* Maintenance....... 509

Cleaning

Interior Care .................................... 510

Exterior Care.................................... 512

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 461 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

462

Maintenance

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle

in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient

brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in

effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and

inspection information.

■Daily inspections

Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when

refueling.

■Periodic inspections

•Check the brake fluid level monthly.

2Checking the Brake Fluid P. 481

•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.

2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 497

•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.

2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 484

•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.

2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 493

■Types of Inspection and Maintenance

1Inspection and Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

emissions control devices and systems may be

done by any automotive repair establishment or

individuals using parts that are “certified” to

EPA standards.

According to state and federal regulations, failure to

perform maintenance on the maintenance main

items marked with # will not void your emissions

warranties. However, all maintenance services should

be performed in accordance with the intervals

indicated by the information display.

2Maintenance Service Items P. 467

If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks

that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a

subscription to the Service Express website at

www.techinfo.honda.com.

2Authorized Manuals P. 557

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make

sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.

After performing maintenance, update the records in

the separate maintenance booklet.

U.S. models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 462 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

463

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.

However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in

performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform

a given task.

•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames

away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

•Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.

uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.

•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not

gasoline.

•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or

compressed air.

•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.

uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.

uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and

the engine is off.

•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.

uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before

touching vehicle parts.

•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.

uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away

from moving parts.

■Maintenance Safety

■Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

WARNING

Improperly maintaining this vehicle or

failing to correct a problem before driving

can cause a crash in which you can be

seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and

maintenance recommendations according

to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

WARNING

Failure to properly follow maintenance

instructions and precautions can cause you

to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and

precautions in this owner’s manual.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 463 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

464

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Maintenance

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the

same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 464 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

465

Continued

Maintenance

Maintenance Minder™

If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages

appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON

(w*1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your

vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. Press the (Select/Reset) knob repeatedly

until the engine oil life appears on the

information display.

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays

on in the instrument panel after the engine oil

life becomes 0%. Have the indicated

maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

Based on the engine operating conditions, the

remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed

as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil

Life (%)

Calculated Engine Oil

Life (%)

100 100 to 91

90 90 to 81

80 80 to 71

70 70 to 61

60 60 to 51

50 50 to 41

40 40 to 31

30 30 to 21

20 20 to 16

15 15 to 11

10 10 to 6

55 to 1

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 465 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

466

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance

To switch the display, press the (Select/Reset) knob.

■Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display

Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator

The engine oil life indicator starts

to appear along with other due

soon maintenance item codes

when the remaining oil life

becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the

end of its service life.

Starts to come on when the

remaining engine oil life becomes

15 percent.

It goes off when the display is

switched.

The SERVICE message also starts

to appear along with the engine oil

life indicator and the maintenance

item codes.

The engine oil has almost reached

the end of its service life, and the

maintenance items should be

inspected and serviced as soon as

possible.

The remaining engine oil life has

passed its service life, and a

negative distance appears after

driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)

or 10 km (Canadian models). The

negative distance on the display

blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.

The maintenance items must be

inspected and serviced

immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when

the display is switched.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 466 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

467

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Continued

Maintenance

■Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

•Independent of the Maintenance Minder

information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

•Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000

km).

•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

they are noisy.

Maintenance Minder

Message

System Message

Indicator

Sub ItemsMain

Item

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the

engine oil every year.

# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE Maintenance Main Items

A●Replace engine oil*1

B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

●Inspect front and rear brakes

●Check parking brake adjustment

●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots

●Inspect suspension components

●Inspect driveshaft boots

●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)

●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids

●Inspect exhaust system#

●Inspect fuel lines and connections#

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

*4: 4WD only

*5: 6-cylinder models

*6: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under

-20°F, -29°C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

CODE Maintenance Sub Items

1●Rotate tires

2●Replace air cleaner element*2

●Replace dust and pollen filter*3

●Inspect drive belt

3●Replace transmission and transfer*4 fluid

4●Replace spark plugs

●Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*5, *6

●Inspect valve clearance

5●Replace engine coolant

6●Replace rear differential fluid*4

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 467 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuMaintenance Minder™uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

468

Maintenance

Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.

2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly

pressing the (Select/Reset) knob.

3. Press and hold the knob for ten seconds

or more.

uThe engine oil life indicator and the

maintenance item codes blink.

4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.

uThe displayed maintenance items

disappear, and the engine oil life display

returns to 100%.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

■Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance

service results in the system showing incorrect

maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious

mechanical problems.

The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after

completing the required maintenance service. If

someone other than a dealer performs maintenance

service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

You can reset the engine oil life display using the

audio/information screen.

2Customized Features* P. 281

Models with audio/information screen

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 468 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

469

Continued

Maintenance

Maintenance Under the Hood

Maintenance Items Under the Hood

4-cylinder models

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange Handle)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Battery

Power Steering Fluid

(Red Cap)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 469 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

470

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

Maintenance

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Dipstick

(Orange Handle)

Washer Fluid

(Blue Cap)

Engine Coolant

Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Brake Fluid

(Black Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Battery

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 470 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

471

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Maintenance

Opening the Hood

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set

the parking brake.

2. Pull the hood release handle under the

lower left corner of the dashboard.

uThe hood will pop up slightly.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center

of the hood to release the lock mechanism,

and open the hood.

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.

uThe hydraulic supports will lift it up the

rest of the way and hold it up.

When closing, lower it to approximately 12

inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with

your hands.

1Opening the Hood

NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are

raised.

The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage

either the hood or the wipers.

When closing the hood, check that the hood is

securely latched.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can

open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch

mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Hood Release Handle

Pull

Lever

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 471 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

472

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Maintenance

Recommended Engine Oil

Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s

performance and longevity. If you drive the

vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,

the engine may fail or be damaged.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving

and that it meets the American Petroleum

Institute’s latest requirements.

Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another

commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for

the ambient temperature as shown.

■Synthetic oil

You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal

and is the specified viscosity grade.

•Genuine Honda Motor Oil

•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the

container.

1Recommended Engine Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,

they may adversely affect the engine performance

and durability.

Ambient Temperature

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 472 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

473

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Continued

Maintenance

Oil Check

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the

oil.

1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

1Oil Check

If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly

add oil being careful not to overfill.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 473 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

474

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Maintenance

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the

level. It should be between the upper and

lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

Upper Mark

Lower Mark

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 474 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

475

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Adding Engine Oil

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.

2. Add oil slowly.

3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten

it securely.

4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the

engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil

If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may

damage the engine compartment components.

NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.

Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and

engine damage.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 475 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

476

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Maintenance

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the

engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the

information display*/multi-information display*.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from

the bottom of the engine, and drain the

oil into a suitable container.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not

dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are

changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of

the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take

it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away

into a garbage can or onto the ground.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Drain Bolt

Washer

Drain BoltWasher

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 476 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

477

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Maintenance

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the

remaining oil.

5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to

the engine contact surface.

uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.

6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the

contact surface of the engine block, and

install a new oil filter.

uApply a light coat of new engine oil to

the oil gasket.

7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then

reinstall the drain bolt.

uTightening torque:

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)

8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the

engine.

uEngine oil change capacity (including

filter):

4.2 US qt (4.0 L)

4.5 US qt (4.3 L)

9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and

start the engine.

10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and

then check that there is no leak from the

drain bolt or oil filter.

11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,

and then check the oil level on the

dipstick.

uIf necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You will need a special wrench to replace the oil

filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.

When installing the new oil filter, follow the

instructions supplied with the oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The

low oil pressure indicator should go off within five

seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check

your work.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Oil Filter

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 477 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

478

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Maintenance

Engine Coolant

This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any

straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the

reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the

radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve

tank.

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

■Reserve Tank

1Engine Coolant

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are

expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to

a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more

information.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may

use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a

temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality

coolant recommended for aluminum engines.

Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result

in corrosion, causing the cooling system to

malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed

and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as

possible.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your

vehicle’s coolant system. They may not be compatible

with the coolant or with the engine components.

Reserve

Tank

MAX

MIN

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

Reserve

Tank

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 478 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

479

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Maintenance

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,

add the specified coolant until it reaches

the MAX mark.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are

cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and

relieve any pressure in the coolant system.

Do not push the cap down when turning.

3. Push down and turn the radiator cap

counterclockwise to remove it.

4. The coolant level should be up to the base

of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it

fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it

reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back

on the reserve tank.

■Radiator

1Radiator

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can

damage components in the engine compartment.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Radiator Cap

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 479 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

480

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Maintenance

Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)

1Automatic Transmission Fluid

NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other

transmission fluids.

Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF

DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and

durability of your vehicle’s transmission, and damage

the transmission.

Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that

is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered

by Honda’s new vehicle warranty.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 480 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

481

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN

and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■Checking the Brake Fluid

1Brake Fluid

NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your

vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive

damage.

If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should

use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed

container as a temporary replacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion

and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the

brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,

have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as

soon as possible.

Brake Reservoir

MIN

MAX

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 481 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

482

uuMaintenance Under the HooduPower Steering Fluid Check*

Maintenance

Power Steering Fluid Check*

We recommend that you check the power steering fluid level every time you refuel.

Check when the engine is not running.

1. Look at the side of the reservoir. The fluid

should be between the UPPER LEVEL and

LOWER LEVEL.

2. Add power steering fluid if necessary to the

UPPER LEVEL mark.

uInspect the system for a leak. If the fluid

level goes below the LOWER LEVEL

frequently, have the system inspected as

soon as possible.

Specified fluid: Honda Power Steering Fluid

1Power Steering Fluid Check*

NOTICE

Turning the steering wheel to full left or right lock

and holding it there can damage the power steering

pump.

NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill

any. Clean up any spills immediately; it could damage

components in the engine compartment.

4-cylinder models

LOWER

LEVEL

UPPER

LEVEL

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 482 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

483

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Maintenance

Refilling Window Washer Fluid

Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the

cap.

If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level

indicator comes on.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water

solution in the windshield washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A

vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield

washer pump.

Level Gauge

Canadian models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 483 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

484

Maintenance

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlight Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

High beam headlight: 60W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)

Low beam headlight: 55W (H11 for halogen bulb type)

■High Beam Headlight

1Headlight Bulbs

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.

Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause

the bulb to overheat and shatter.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not

need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry

heavy items in the cargo area or tow a trailer, have

the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified

technician.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,

and protect the glass from contact with your skin or

hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with

denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

The exterior lights’ inside lenses (headlights, brake

lights, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or

while driving in the rain. This does not impact the

exterior light function.

However, if you see a large amount of water or ice

accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

Passenger side

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 484 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

485

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

Maintenance

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

opposite side from the light being replaced.

Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel

to the left.

Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the

right.

2. Remove the holding clip and screw, and

pull the inner fender back.

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

■Low Beam Headlights

1Headlight Bulbs

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the

central pin to remove the clip.

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push

until it is flat.

Central pin

Push until the

pin is flat.

Holding

Clip

Screw

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 485 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

486

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs

Maintenance

Fog Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Remove the holding clips, then push up the

under cover.

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light

assembly and turn it to the right.

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

Fog Light: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type)

1Fog Light Bulbs

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,

or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to

overheat and shatter.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its

plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with

your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean

it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.

2Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Holding Clips

Under Cover

Passenger side

Tab

Coupler

Bulb

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 486 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

487

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs

Maintenance

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

right.

2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and

pull the inner fender back.

3. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

4. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

5. Insert a new bulb into the headlight

assembly and turn it to the right.

6. Insert the coupler into the connector of the

bulb.

1Fog Light Bulbs

Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.

2Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Holding Clip

Screw

Driver side

Bulb

Coupler

Tab

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 487 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

488

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulb

Maintenance

Front Side Marker Light Bulb

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the

opposite side from the light being replaced.

Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel

to the left.

Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the

right.

2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and

pull the inner fender back.

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,

then remove the old bulb.

4. Insert a new bulb.

Front Side Marker Light: 5 W

1Front Side Marker Light Bulb

Remove the clip by using a flat-tip screwdriver.

2Low Beam Headlights P. 485

Holding Clip

Screw

Bulb Socket

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 488 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

489

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

Continued

Maintenance

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the

upper part of the air intake duct and the air

intake tube.

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

Front Turn Signal/Parking: 24/2.2CP

Tube

Holding Clip

Driver side

6-cylinder models

Passenger side

All models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 489 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

490

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

3. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until

it unlocks, and remove.

4. Insert new bulb.

Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal

Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip

screwdriver to remove the covers.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

Bulb

Socket

Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W

Back-Up Light: 21 W

Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)

Rear Side Maker Light: 3 CP

Cover

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 490 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

491

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillights, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Maintenance

2. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver to remove

the bolts.

3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

Remove the old bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb.

Bolt

Bulb

Socket

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 491 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

492

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb

Maintenance

Rear License Plate Light Bulb

When replacing, use the following bulb.

1. Push the left edge of the lens to the right

and pull out the licence light assembly.

2. Push the tabs to remove the lens.

3. Remove the old bulb.

4. Insert a new bulb.

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb

High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer

inspect and replace the light bulbs.

Rear License Plate Light: 5 W

Bulb

Tab

Lens

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 492 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

493

Continued

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades

Checking Wiper Blades

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper

arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the

passenger side.

2. Pry on the edge of the lock tab using a flat-

tip screwdriver to push it up.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.

1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the

windshield.

Lock Tab

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 493 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

494

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by

pulling the tabbed end out.

5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade

that has been removed, and mount to a

new rubber blade.

uCorrectly align the rubber protrusion and

the retainer grooves.

6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder

from the bottom end.

uThe tab on the holder should fit in the

indent of the wiper blade.

7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,

then push down the lock tab.

8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,

then the driver side.

Blade

Top Retainer

Blade

Tab

Indent

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 494 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

495

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Continued

Maintenance

Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Raise the wiper arm off.

2. Pry on the edge of the lock tab using a flat-

tip screwdriver to push it up.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

3. Slide the wiper blade out from the end with

the indent.

1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the

rear window.

Lock Tab

Blade

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 495 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

496

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber

Maintenance

4. Remove the retainers from wiper blade and

mount to a new rubber blade.

5. Slide the wiper blade onto the holder.

uMake sure it is engaged correctly, then

install the wiper blade assembly onto the

wiper arm.

Retainer

Rubber

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 496 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

497

Maintenance

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in

good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■Inflation guidelines

Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.

Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and

are more likely to fail from overheating.

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,

and wear unevenly.

Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the

others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in

all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to

20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

■Inspection guidelines

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.

Look for:

•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,

splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.

•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.

•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.

•Excessive tread wear.

2Wear Indicators P. 502

•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

1Checking Tires

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This

means the vehicle has been parked for at least three

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If

necessary, add or release air until the specified

pressure is reached.

If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as

4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if

checked when cold.

Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent

vibration while driving. New tires and any that have

been removed and reinstalled should be properly

balanced.

WARNING

Using tires that are excessively worn or

improperly inflated can cause a crash in

which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding tire inflation and

maintenance.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 497 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

498

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Maintenance

Tire and Loading Information Label

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading

information.

Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle have a

number of markings. Those you should be

aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire and Loading Information Label

The tire and loading information label attached to the

driver’s doorjamb contains:

aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.

bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not

exceed this weight.

cThe original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.

dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and

spare.

Label

Example

Example Tire Size

Tire

Identification

Number (TIN)

Maximum

Tire Load

Maximum

Tire Pressure

Tire Size

■Tire Sizes

1Tire Sizes

Following is an example of tire size with an

explanation of what each component means.

225/60 R18 100H

225: Tire width in millimeters.

60: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a

percentage of its width).

R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

18: Rim diameter in inches.

100: Load index (a numerical code associated with

the maximum load the tire can carry).

H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the

maximum speed rating).

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 498 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

499

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

Maintenance

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like

the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at

least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can

hold.

Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum

permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves

designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

■Tire Identification Number (TIN)

■Glossary of Tire Terminology

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)

DOT B97R FW6X 2209

DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all

requirements of the U.S. Department of

Transportation.

B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.

FW6X: Tire type code.

22 09: Date of manufacture.

Year

Week

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 499 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

500

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Maintenance

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety

Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,

and temperature performance according to Department of

Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these

gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150

would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in

driving habits, service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

■Uniform Tire Quality Grading

■Treadwear

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:

Treadwear 200

Traction AA

Temperature A

All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 500 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

501

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Maintenance

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement

as measured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which

all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

■Traction

■Temperature

1Traction

Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak

traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for

this tire is established for a tire that is

properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible

tire failure.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 501 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

502

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Maintenance

Wear Indicators

The groove where the wear indicator is

located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than

elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so

that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.

Worn out tires have poor traction on wet

roads.

Tire Service Life

The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road

conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and

environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is

recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five

years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10

years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Example of a Wear

Indicator mark

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 502 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

503

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Maintenance

Tire and Wheel Replacement

Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and

maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a

different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)

system to work incorrectly.

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the

front or rear tires in pairs.

Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

WARNING

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can

affect handling and stability. This can cause

a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or

killed.

Always use the size and type of tires

recommended in this owner’s manual.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 503 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

504

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Maintenance

Tire Rotation

Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display/

multi-information display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■Tires without rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

■Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation

Tires with directional tread patterns should only be

rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).

Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation

indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front

Direction Mark

Front

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 504 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

505

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Maintenance

Winter Tires

If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,

or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when

driving.

Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent

skidding.

Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.

When mounting, refer to the following points.

For winter tires:

•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.

•Mount the tires to all four wheels.

For tire chains:

•Install them on the front tires only.

•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the

chains listed below:

•Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as

tightly as you can.

•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.

•Drive slowly.

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1042

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain TC2111 MM

1Winter Tires

NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly

installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,

suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are

hitting any part of the vehicle.

When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain

manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle

operational limits.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be

aware that these tires are not designed for winter

driving conditions. For more information, contact a

dealer.

WARNING

Using the wrong chains, or not properly

installing chains, can damage the brake

lines and cause a crash in which you can be

seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owner’s

manual regarding the selection and use of

tire chains.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 505 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

506

Maintenance

Battery

Checking the Battery

Check the battery condition monthly. Look at

the test indicator window and check the

terminals for corrosion.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:

•The audio system is disabled.

2Reactivating the audio system P. 166

•The clock resets.

2Setting the Clock P. 88

•The navigation system* is disabled.

2Refer to the navigation system manual

Charging the Battery

Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.

Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,

and related accessories contain lead

and lead compounds.

Wash your hands after handling.

The test indicator’s color information is on the

battery.

When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals

by applying a baking powder and water solution.

Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel

dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to

help prevent future corrosion.

WARNING

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen

gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to

explode with enough force to kill or

seriously hurt you.

When conducting any battery

maintenance, wear protective clothing and

a face shield, or have a skilled technician do

it.

Test Indicator Window

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 506 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

507

Continued

Maintenance

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Button Battery

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-

head screwdriver.

2. Open the remote transmitter.

uWrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratching the

transmitter.

3. Remove the button battery with the small

flat-tip screwdriver.

4. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Master Keys with Remote Transmitter*

1Replacing the Button Battery

NOTICE

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the

environment. Always confirm local regulations for

battery disposal.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or

at a dealer.

Screw

Battery type: CR1620

Battery

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 507 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

508

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

Maintenance

1. Remove the built-in key.

2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying

on the edge with a coin.

uRemove carefully to avoid losing the

buttons.

uWrap a coin with a cloth to prevent

scratching the smart entry remote.

3. Make sure to replace the battery with the

correct polarity.

■Smart Entry Remote*

Battery type: CR2032

Battery

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 508 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

509

Maintenance

Heating and Cooling System

/Climate Control System

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

The heating and cooling system*/climate control system* is equipped with a dust

and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The

Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.

We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your

vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

1Dust and Pollen Filter

If the airflow from the heating and cooling system*/

climate control system* deteriorates noticeably, and

the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be

replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 509 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

510

Maintenance

Cleaning

Interior Care

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.

Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.

Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

■Cleaning Seat Belts

1Interior Care

Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.

Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if

liquids are splashed on them.

Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices

such as audio devices and switches.

Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire

inside the vehicle.

If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on

electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and

liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,

and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.

Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as

benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them

off using a dry cloth.

Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts

or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Opening

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 510 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

511

uuCleaninguInterior Care

Maintenance

The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor

anchors, which keep the mat from sliding

forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn

the anchor knobs to the unlock position.

When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn

the knobs to the lock position.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of

the anchored mat.

Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats

and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and

10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or

dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

■Floor Mats

1Floor Mats

If you use any floor mats that were not originally

provided with your vehicle, make sure they are

designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and

are securely anchored by the floor anchors.

Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are

not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere

with the front seat functions.

Lock

Unlock

■Maintaining Genuine Leather*

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 511 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

512

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

Exterior Care

Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.

Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a

painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following

conditions:

•If driving on roads with road salt.

•If driving in coastal areas.

•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the

automated car wash.

•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.

•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to

enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

■Washing the Vehicle

■Using an Automated Car Wash

■Using High Pressure Cleaners

1Washing the Vehicle

Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine

compartment. It can cause a malfunction.

Air Intake Vents

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 512 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

513

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the

elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the

elements, so reapply as necessary.

If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they

may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and

clean water.

Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road

contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.

Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or

a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that

helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

■Applying Wax

■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

■Cleaning the Window

■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

1Applying Wax

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage

the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up

spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts

Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when

you want to repair the painted surface of the parts

made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window

Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.

Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a

soft cloth so as not to damage them.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 513 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

514

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 514 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

515

Handling the Unexpected

This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools

Types of Tools .................................. 516

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire......................... 517

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine........................ 525

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is

Weak..........................................526

Emergency Engine Stop ................... 527

Jump Starting.................................... 528

Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 531

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating............. 532

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes

On................................................ 534

If the Charging System Indicator Comes

On ................................................. 534

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes

On or Blinks ................................... 535

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes

On ................................................... 536

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On... 536

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes

On ................................................. 537

If the TPMS Indicator Comes On ...... 537

Fuses

Fuse Locations ................................. 538

Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 541

Emergency Towing........................... 542

When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill

Door................................................. 543

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate .. 544

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 515 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

516

Handling the Unexpected

Tools

Types of Tools

1Types of Tools

The tools were stored in the cargo area.

Wheel Nut Wrench/

Jack Handle

Jack

Jack Handle Bar

Tool Case

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 516 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

517

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually

to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact

spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or

replaced.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking

brake.

2. Move the shift lever to (P.

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Changing a Flat Tire

Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact

spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.

Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the

vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with

a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are

specifically for this model.

Do not use them with another vehicle.

Do not use another type of compact spare tire or

wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.

If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of

the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact

spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it

with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.

Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Do not use a puncture-repairing agent on a flat tire,

as it can damage the tire pressure sensor.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 517 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

518

Handling the Unexpected

1. Push the rear edge of the handle on the

front cargo floor lid and open the lid.

2. Remove the hook from the back of the

cargo floor lid.

Pull the hook to the hole on the side

panel.

3. Take out the removable box.

2Under-floor Storage Area P. 150

4. Take the jack, extension bar, and wheel

nut wrench out of the tool case.

■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire

1Changing a Flat Tire

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call

your dealer or a professional towing service.

Handle

Tool Case

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 518 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 519

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

5. Remove the cover on the cargo area lining

to access the shaft for the spare tire hoist.

6. Attach the short end of the wheel nut

wrench to the spare tire holder shaft.

Turn the wrench to the left to loosen the

shaft.

7. Attach the longer section of the wrench to

the shaft, and turn it until you can see the

spare tire.

uDo not turn the wrench any further

once you feel resistance.

8. Lift up the spare tire holder, then slide the

hook to lift down the holder.

9. Remove the spare tire from the holder.

1Changing a Flat Tire

NOTICE

The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is

specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use

any other tool.

Cover

Wheel Nut Wrench

Spare Tire

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 519 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

520

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

10. Place a wheel block or rock in front and

rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

11. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side

up) under the vehicle body, near the tire

that needs to be replaced.

12. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn

using the wheel nut wrench.

Wheel

Blocks

The tire to be replaced.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 520 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 521

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Place the jack under the jacking point

closest to the tire to be changed.

2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the

image) clockwise until the top of the jack

contacts the jacking point.

uMake sure that the jacking point tab is

resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar

and the jack handle, until the tire is off the

ground.

■How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the

vehicle.

Use the jack provided in your vehicle.

Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or

their shape may not match.

The following instructions must be followed to use

the jack safely.

•Do not use while the engine is running.

•Use only where the ground is firm and level.

•Use only at the jacking points.

•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.

•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the

jack.

WARNING

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,

seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire

exactly, and never get under the vehicle

when it is supported only by the jack.

Jack

Handle

Bar Wheel Nut

Wrench as Jack Handle

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 521 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

522

Handling the Unexpected

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel

with a clean cloth.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.

4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the

lips around the mounting holes, and stop

rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts in the order

indicated in the image. Go around,

tightening the nuts, two to three times in

this order.

Wheel nut torque:

80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

■Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra

torque using your foot or a pipe.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 522 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 523

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

1. Put the Flat tire in the storage bag provided

with your vehicle.

uThe storage bag is in the tool case.

2. Knot the top of the storage bag.

3. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench

back in the tool case.

4. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding

belt through the hole of the bag and the

wheel of the flat tire as shown.

5. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and

thread the belt through the cargo hook as

shown.

6. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten

the belt to secure the flat tire in place.

■Storing the Flat Tire

1Storing the Flat Tire

Always raise the spare tire holder, even if you are not

stowing a tire. If the holder is left down, it will be

damaged during driving and need to be replaced.

To reinstall the spare tire, place it facing up on the

spare tire holder.

NOTICE

If you store the spare tire face down, it can be

damaged and needs to be replaced.

WARNING

Loose items can fly around the interior in a

crash and can seriously injure the

occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely

before driving.

Spare

Tire

Spare Tire Holder

Belt

Cargo Hook

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 523 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

524

Handling the Unexpected

If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure indicator comes on

while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the indicator will go

off and the TPMS indicator comes on, but this is normal.

If you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the low tire pressure or TPMS

indicator will go off after a few miles (kilometers).

■TPMS and the Spare Tire

1TPMS and the Spare Tire

The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare

tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure

that it is correct.

Use TPMS specific wheels. Each is equipped with a

tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind

the valve stem.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 524 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

525

Handling the Unexpected

Engine Does Not Start

Checking the Engine

If the engine does not start, turn the ignition switch to START (e*1 and check the

starter.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

Starter condition Checklist

Starter doesn’t turn or turns

over slowly.

The battery may be dead. Check

each of the items on the right and

respond accordingly.

Check for a message on the information display.

●If the NO KEY message appears

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.

2ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 115

Check brightness of the interior light.

Turn on interior lights and check brightness.

●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

2Battery P. 506

●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 538

The starter turns over normally

but the engine doesn’t start.

There may be a problem with the

fuse. Check each of the items on

the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.

Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 420, 422

Check the immobilizer system indicator.

When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.

2Immobilizer System P. 107

Check the fuel level.

There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 83

Check the fuse.

Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 541

If the problem continues:

2Emergency Towing P. 542

1Checking the Engine

If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an

assisting vehicle to jump start it.

2Jump Starting P. 528

Models with smart entry

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 525 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

526

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Handling the Unexpected

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,

and the engine won’t start.

Start the engine as follows.

1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the H logo on the smart

entry remote while the indicator on the

ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.

The buttons on the smart entry remote

should be facing you.

uThe indicator flashes for about 30

seconds.

2. Depress the brake pedal and press the

ENGINE START/STOP button within 10

seconds after the beeper sounds and the

indicator stays on.

uIf you don’t depress the pedal, the mode

will change to ACCESSORY.

Models with smart entry system

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 526 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

527

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Engine Stop

If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do

either of the following operations:

•Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.

•Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button two times.

The steering wheel will not lock.

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P, and to

ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P.

Models with smart entry system

1Emergency Engine Stop

Do not press the button while driving unless it is

absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched

off.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 527 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

528

Handling the Unexpected

Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,

then open the hood.

1. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle’s battery + terminal.

2. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery - terminal.

■Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they

do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be

careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the

cable ends to touch each other while attaching or

detaching the jumper cables.

WARNING

A battery can explode if you do not follow

the correct procedure, seriously injuring

anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking

materials away from the battery.

Booster Battery

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Booster Battery

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 528 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Continued 529

uuJump Startingu

Handling the Unexpected

4. Connect the other end of the second

jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt

(4-cylinder models)/engine hanger

(6-cylinder models) as shown.

Do not connect this jumper cable to any

other part.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another

vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine

and increase its rpm slightly.

6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it

turns over slowly, check that the jumper

cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting

Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and

may prevent the engine from starting.

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 529 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

530

uuJump Startingu

Handling the Unexpected

Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following

order.

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s ground.

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -

terminal.

3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +

terminal.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

■What to Do After the Engine Starts

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 530 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

531

Handling the Unexpected

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P

position.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart

entry remote.

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-

tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock

release slot as shown in the image, and

remove the cover.

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

5. While pushing the key down, press the shift

lever release button and place the shift lever

into (N.

uThe lock is now released. Have the shift

lever checked by a dealer as soon as

possible.

■Releasing the Lock

Slot

Cover

Models without smart entry system

Models with smart entry system

All models

Release

Button

Shift Lock Release Slot

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 531 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

532

Handling the Unexpected

Overheating

How to Handle Overheating

Overheating symptoms are as follows:

•The temperature gauge needle is at the mark or the engine suddenly loses

power.

•Steam is coming out of the engine compartment.

■First thing to do

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.

uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.

uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.

Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge

needle at the mark may damage the engine.

WARNING

Steam and spray from an overheated

engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 532 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

533

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

■Next thing to do

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and

stop the engine once the temperature

gauge needle comes down.

uIf the cooling fan is not operating,

immediately stop the engine.

2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect

the coolant level and check the coolant

system components for leaks.

uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is

low, add coolant until it reaches the

MAX mark.

uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,

check that the radiator is cool. Cover the

radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open

the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to

the base of the filler neck, and put the

cap back on.

■Last thing to do

Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.

If the temperature needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone down,

contact a dealer for repairs.

1How to Handle Overheating

If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.

Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.

Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze

as soon as possible.

WARNING

Removing the radiator cap while the

engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray

out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool

down before removing the radiator cap.

Reserve

Tank

MAX

MIN

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 533 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

534

Handling the Unexpected

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.

■What to do after parking the vehicle

1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.

uAdd oil as necessary.

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.

uThe light goes out: Start driving again.

uThe light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and

contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Turn off the heating and cooling system*/climate control system*, rear

defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer

for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause

serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the

engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge

the battery.

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 534 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

535

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or

Blinks

■Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control

system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.

•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.

■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on

Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a

dealer.

■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks

Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least

ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

■The message appears on when:

An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being

loose or not being installed.

■What to do when the message appears:

1. Stop the engine.

2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.

uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.

3. Drive for several days of normal driving.

uThe message should go off.

■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of

gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described

above.

■Check Fuel Cap Message

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,

the emissions control system and the engine could be

damaged.

If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when

restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at

31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle

inspected.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 535 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

536

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•The brake fluid is low.

•There is a malfunction in the brake system.

■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving

Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.

•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.

•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the

transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•Comes on when there is a problem with EPS system.

•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine

speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and

sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.

If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle

inspected by a dealer.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.

It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there

is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop

immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift

the gears.

If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come

on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution

system is not working. This can result in vehicle

instability under sudden braking.

Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

U.S.

Canada

1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an

extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on

the full left or right position for a while, the system

heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,

and limits its performance. The steering wheel

becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the

system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated

operation under these conditions can eventually

damage the system.

6-cylinder models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 536 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

537

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

Handling the Unexpected

If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

A tire pressure is significantly low. If the compact spare tire is installed,

the indicator stays on for a while, and then goes off after driving a few

miles (kilometers).

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on

the driver side doorjamb.

If the TPMS Indicator Comes On

■Reasons for the indicator to come on

•Comes on when there is a problem with the TPMS.

•If the compact spare is installed, the indicator comes on after driving

for a few miles (kilometers).

■What to do when the indicator comes on

Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact

spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size

tire. The indicator goes off after driving a few miles (kilometers).

1If the Low Tire Pressure Indicator Comes On

NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause

it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always

inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 537 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

538

Handling the Unexpected

Fuses

Fuse Locations

If any electrical devices are not working,

turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and

check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push

the tabs to open the box.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box

cover. Locate the fuse in question by the

fuse number and box cover number.

■Engine Compartment Fuse Box

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

Battery 120 A*3

Battery 100 A*2

Passenger’s Fuse Box 40 A

ESP MTR 70 A

VSA SFR 40 A

VSA Motor 30 A

AS F/B OP 40 A

Headlight washer*30 A

− −

IG Main 50 A

− −

Passenger Side Light Main 30 A

DR F/B STD 60 A

Driver Side Light Main 30 A

Main Fan 30 A

Wiper Motor 30 A

Sub Fan 30 A

4 Fan Relay 7.5 A

5Rear Defroster 40 A

6 Sub Fan Motor*2 20 A

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an

ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

*2:4-cylinder models

*3:6-cylinder models

7Hazard 15 A

8 Horn, STOP 20 A

9 − −

10 Trailer 15 A

11 IG Coil 15 A

12 FI Sub 15 A

13 IGI Main 1*3 30 A

14 IGI Main 2*3 30 A

15 Back up 10 A

16 Interior Lights 7.5 A

17 FI Main 15 A

18 DBW 15 A

19 ACM*3 20 A

20 Heater Motor 40 A

21 MG Clutch 7.5 A

Circuit Protected Amps

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 538 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

539

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Continued

Handling the Unexpected

Locate the fuse in question by the fuse

number and label number.

Located under the dashboard.

Fuse locations are shown on the label under

the dashboard.

■Interior Fuse Box

Fuse Label

Fuse Box

Driver side

Located on the lower side panel. Take off

the cover to open.

Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box

cover.

Passenger side

■Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected Amps

1 − −

2Seat Memory*7.5 A

3Washer 15 A

4Wiper 10 A

5ODS 7.5 A

6ABS/VSA 7.5 A

7 − −

8 − −

9Fuel Pump 20 A

10 VB SOL 2 10 A

11 Meter 7.5 A

12 ACG 15 A

13 SRS 10 A

14 − −

15 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A

16 A/C 7.5 A

Driver side

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 539 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

540

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

*1:4-cylinder models

*2:6-cylinder models

*3:Sub fuse box

17 Accessory, Key, Lock 7.5 A

18 Accessory 7.5 A

19 Left Power Seat Sliding 20 A

20 Moonroof 20 A

21 Left Power Seat Reclining 20 A

22 Rear Left Power Window 20 A

23 Front Accessory Power

Socket 15 A

24 Front Left Power Window 20 A

25 Left Door Lock 15 A

26 Front Left Fog Light 10 A

27 Left Small Lights (Exterior) 10 A

28 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A

29 TPMS 7.5 A

30 Left Headlight Low Beam 15 A

31 − −

32*3 ST MG DIODE*, *1 7.5 A

Stop*, *2 7.5 A

33*3 STRLD*7.5 A

Circuit Protected Amps

1Right Headlight High Beam 10 A

2Right Small Lights (Exterior) 10 A

3Front Right Fog Light 10 A

4Right Headlight Low Beam 15 A

5 − −

6Interior Lights 7.5 A

7 − −

8Right Power Seat Reclining 20 A

9Right Power Seat Sliding 20 A

10 Right Door Lock 10 A

11 Rear Right Power Window 20 A

12 SMART*10 A

13 Front Right Power Window 20 A

14 − −

15 Audio Amp 20 A

16 Accessory Power Socket

(Cargo Area) 15 A

17 − −

18 Power Lumbar*7.5 A

19 Seat Heaters*15 A

20 − −

21 − −

22 − −

Passenger side

* Not available on all models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 540 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

541

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Handling the Unexpected

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Check the large fuse in the engine

compartment.

uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head

screwdriver to remove the screw and

replace it with a new one.

4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine

compartment and the vehicle interior.

uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it

with the fuse puller and replace it with a

new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses

NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating

greatly increases the chances of damaging the

electrical system.

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified

amperage.

Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on

P. 538 to 540.

There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine

compartment fuse box cover.

Combined Fuse

Blown Fuse

Fuse Puller

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 541 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

542

Handling the Unexpected

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■Flat bed equipment

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■Wheel lift equipment

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off

the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to

tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing

NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will

cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed

to support the vehicle’s weight.

NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a

motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the

transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.

It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift

from side to side or break.

All models

2WD models

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 542 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

543

Handling the Unexpected

When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Pry on the front edge of the cover using a

flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover.

uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth

to prevent scratches.

3. Pull the release lever towards you.

uThe release lever unlocks and opens the

fuel fill door when it is pulled.

■What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

1What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the

vehicle checked.

Cover

Release Lever

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 543 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

544

Handling the Unexpected

When You Cannot Open the Tailgate

If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.

1. Use a flat-tip screwdriver and remove the

cover on the inside of the tailgate.

uWrap the flap-tip screwdriver with a

cloth to prevent scratches.

2. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate

while sliding the lever to the side using a

flat-tip screwdriver.

■What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate

1What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate

What to do-Following up

After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the

vehicle checked.

When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure

there is enough space around the tailgate, and it

does not hit anyone or any object.

Cover

Lever

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 544 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

545

Information

This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other

information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 546

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ... 550

Engine Number and Transmission

Number...................................... 550

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 551

Reporting Safety Defects ................. 552

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 553

Warranty Coverages ........................ 555

Authorized Manuals......................... 557

Customer Service Information......... 558

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 545 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

546

Information

Specifications

■Vehicle Specifications

Model Crosstour

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Rear 3

Total 5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating

U.S.: 4,784 lbs (2,170 kg)

Canada: 2,170 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,469 lbs (1,120 kg)

Canada: 1,120 kg

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)

Canada: 1,080 kg

Air Conditioning:

Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge Quantity 14.1 – 15.9 oz (400 – 450 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

4-cylinder models

■Engine Specifications

■Fuel

■Battery

*1: Canadian models

■Washer Fluid

Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11S

DENSO SXU22HCR11S

Fuel:

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)

Capacity/Type 38AH(5)/47AH(20)

52AH(5)/65AH(20)*1

Tank Capacity 5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)

■Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)

Fog Lights 55W (H11)

Front Side Marker Lights 5W

Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 24/2.2CP (Amber)

Brake/Taillights 21/5W

Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP

Back-Up Lights 21W

Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)

High-Mount Brake Light LED

Rear License Plate Lights 5W

Cargo Area Light 5W

Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W

Ceiling Light 8W

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

Glove Box Light 1.4W

Ambient Light LED

Courtesy Lights 2CP

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 546 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

547

uuSpecificationsu

Continued

Information

■Brake Fluid

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

■Power Steering Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda ATF DW-1

(automatic transmission fluid)

Capacity Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)

Specified Honda Power Steering Fluid

■Engine Oil

■Engine Coolant

Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.0 US qt (3.8 ℓ)

Change

including

filter

4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.66 US gal (6.3 ℓ)

(change including the remaining 0.18 US gal

(0.68 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

■Tire

Regular

Size 225/65R17 102T

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Front 32 (220 [2.2])

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])

Compact

Spare

Size T155/90D16 110M

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size Regular 17 x 6 1/2J

Compact Spare 16 x 4T

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 547 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

548

uuSpecificationsu

Information

■Vehicle Specifications

*1: 2WD models

*2: 4WD models

Model Crosstour

No. of Passengers:

Front 2

Rear 3

Total 5

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating

U.S.: 4,938 lbs (2,240 kg)*1

5,115 lbs (2,320 kg)*2

Canada: 2,240 kg*1

2,320 kg*2

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Front) U.S.: 2,623 lbs (1,190 kg)*1

2,668 lbs (1,210 kg)*2

Canada: 1,190 kg*1

1,210 kg*2

Gross Axle Weight

Rating (Rear) U.S.: 2,381 lbs (1,080 kg)*1

2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2

Canada: 1,080 kg*1

1,140 kg*2

Air Conditioning:

Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge Quantity 14.1 – 15.9 oz (400 – 450 g)

Lubricant Type ND-OIL 8

6-cylinder models

■Engine Specifications

■Fuel

■Battery

■Washer Fluid

Displacement 212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)

Spark Plugs NGK ILZKR7B11

DENSO SXU22HCR11

Fuel:

Type

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number

of 87 or higher

Fuel Tank Capacity 18.5 US gal (70 ℓ)

Capacity/Type 60AH(5)/72AH(20)

Tank Capacity 5.3 US qt (5.0 ℓ)

■Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam) 55W (H11)

Headlights (High Beam) 60W (HB3)

Fog Lights 55W (H11)

Front Side Marker Lights 5W

Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 24/2.2CP (Amber)

Brake/Taillights 21/5W

Rear Side Marker Lights 3CP

Back-Up Lights 21W

Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)

High-Mount Brake Light LED

Rear License Plate Lights 5W

Cargo Area Light 5W

Interior Lights

Map Lights 8W

Ceiling Light 8W

Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W

Glove Box Light 1.4W

Ambient Light LED

Courtesy Lights 2CP

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 548 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

549

uuSpecificationsu

Information

■Brake Fluid

■Automatic Transmission Fluid

■Rear Differential Fluid

■Transfer Assembly Fluid

Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Specified Honda ATF DW-1

(automatic transmission fluid)

Capacity Change 3.28 US qt (3.1 ℓ)

Specified Honda Dual Pump Fluid II

Capacity Change 1.3 US qt (1.2 ℓ)

Specified ·SAE 90 Viscosity Hypoid Gear Oil

·API Service Classified GL4 or GL5 only

Capacity Change 0.43 US qt (0.41 ℓ)

■Engine Oil

■Engine Coolant

Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20

·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil

Capacity

Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)

Change

including

filter

4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)

Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio 50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.92 US gal (7.3 ℓ)

(change including the remaining 0.17 US gal

(0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

■Tire

*1: 2WD models

*2: 4WD models

Regular

Size 225/60R18 100H

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 33 (230 [2.3])

Front

Rear 33 (230 [2.3])

Compact

Spare

Size T155/90D16 110M*1

T155/90D17 101M*2

Pressure

psi (kPa [kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])

Wheel Size

Regular 18 x 7J

Compact Spare 16 x 4T*1

17 x 4T*2

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 549 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

550

Information

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your

vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the

image below for the VIN locations.

Engine Number and Transmission Number

See the image below for the locations of your vehicle’s engine number and

transmission number.

1Engine Number and Transmission Number

The transmission number is located on the side of the

transmission.

Vehicle

Identification

Number

Engine Number

Certification Label/

Vehicle Identification

Number

Automatic Transmission

Number

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Engine Number

Automatic Transmission

Number

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 550 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

551

Information

Devices that Emit Radio Waves

The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in operation.

Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required

standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada

Standard, described below:

As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Audio System

Bluetooth® Audio

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

Immobilizer System

Smart Entry System

Remote Transmitter

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 551 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

552

Information

Reporting Safety Defects

In the U.S.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists

in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-

9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada

cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For

more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/

roadsafety.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 552 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

553

Continued

Information

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.

Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle’s emissions

components are working properly.

The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has

gone dead or been disconnected.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, without starting the

engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then

goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are

not set.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,

prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.

2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).

4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20

seconds.

5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there

for about 3 minutes.

6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an

ignition switch.

1Testing of Readiness Codes

The readiness codes are erased when the battery is

disconnected, and set again only after several days of

driving under a variety of conditions.

If a testing facility determines that the readiness

codes are not set, you may be requested to return at

a later date to complete the test.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes

are still not set, see a dealer.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 553 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

554

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

Information

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed

of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in

(D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without

moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you

cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for

at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions

allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal

or the brake pedal.

9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 554 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

555

Continued

Information

Warranty Coverages

■U.S. Owners

Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the

emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and

workmanship.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance

Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.

Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for

exact information.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered

by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for

rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this

warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other

factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts

against defects in materials and workmanship.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 555 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

556

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a

replacement battery purchased from a dealer.

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as

long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda

warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on

warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.

Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■Canadian Owners

Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 556 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

557

Information

Authorized Manuals

■Service Express

For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to

Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■For U.S. Owners:

The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can

order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at

www.helminc.com.

Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering

other models’ or other years’ manuals.

Publication

Form Number Form Description

61TY401 2013 Crosstour L4 Service Manual

61TP603 2010-2013 Crosstour V6 Service Manual

61TP631 2010-2012 Model Series Crosstour Body Repair Manual

31TP6630 2013 Crosstour Owner’s Manual

31TP6830 2013 Crosstour Navigation System Owner’s Manual

31TP6M30 2013 Crosstour Service History

31TP6A30 2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide (EX)

31TP6B30 2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide (EX-L)

31TP6C30 2013 Crosstour Technology Reference Guide

(EX/EL-L with Navigation)

HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

1Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures

for repair to engine and chassis components. It is

written for the journeyman technician, but it is simple

enough for most mechanically inclined owners to

understand.

Body Repair Manual:

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement

of damaged body parts.

For Canadian Owners:

Si vous avez besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en

français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire

de commander le numéro de pièce 33TP6C30

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 557 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

558

Information

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.

They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that

your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the

dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the

decision made by the dealership’s management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Honda Automobile Customer Services

Mail Stop 500-2N-7A

1919 Torrance Blvd.

Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners:

Honda Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

180 Honda Boulevard

Markham, ON

L6C 0H9

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: 1-877-939-0909

E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands:

Bella International

P.O. Box 190816

San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

1Customer Service Information

When you call or write, please give us the following

information:

•Vehicle Identification Number

2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

P. 550

•Date of purchase

•Odometer reading of your vehicle

•Your name, address, and telephone number

•A detailed description of the problem

•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 558 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

559

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Continued

Information

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote®.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content

delivery.

For more information, visit

www.gracenote.com.

When music is recorded to the HDD from a

CD, information such as the recording artist

and track name are retrieved from the

Gracenote Database and displayed (when

available).

Gracenote may not contain information for

all albums.

Gracenote is an internet-based music

recognition service that allows artist, album,

and track information from CDs to display

on the HDD.

Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates

a year. More information about Gracenote,

its features, and downloads are available at

■Gracenote Music Recognition

Service (CDDB)

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or

www.honda.ca (in Canada).

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright

One or more patents owned by Gracenote

apply to this product and service. See the

Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list

of applicable Gracenote patents.

Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,

the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the

“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Gracenote in the United States and/or other

countries.

This application or device contains software

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,

California (“Gracenote”). The software

from Gracenote (the “Gracenote

Software”) enables this application to

perform disc and/or file identification and

obtain music- related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information

(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or

■Gracenote® END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT

embedded databases (collectively,

“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other

functions. You may use Gracenote Data

only by means of the intended End-User

functions or this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,

the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers for your own personal non-

commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT

GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE

SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,

EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to

use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers will

terminate if you violate these restrictions. If

your license terminates, you agree to cease

any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote

Servers.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 559 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

560

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Information

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote

Data, the Gracenote Software, and the

Gracenote Servers, including all ownership

rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment

to you for any information that you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce

its rights under this Agreement against you

directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical

purposes. The purpose of a randomly

assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For

more information, see the web page for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote

service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or

warranties, express or implied, regarding

the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in

the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves

the right to delete data from the Gracenote

Servers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

warranty is made that the Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers are error-

free or that functioning of Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers will be

uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you

with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in

the future and is free to discontinue its

services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES

NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE

GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY

GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL

GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR

LOST REVENUES.

Requirements to access Pandora®

•Latest version of the Pandora app

installed on your Android, Blackberry, or

iPhone.

•Registered Pandora account (you can

create a free account at

www.pandora.com <http://

www.pandora.com/> or on your

smartphone)

•Connection to the internet via WiFi or

cellular data network.

■Disclaimer of Pandora®

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 560 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

561

uuCustomer Service Informationu

Information

Limitations

•Access to Pandora requires an active

internet connection

•Ability to access Pandora through this

system is subject to change without

notice

•Certain functionality of Pandora service is

not available when accessing the service

through this system including, but not

limited to, creating new stations, deleting

stations, emailing current stations,

buying songs, viewing additional text

information, logging in to Pandora, and

adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.

Pandora internet radio is a music service

not affiliated with HONDA. More

information is available at http://

www.pandora.com <http://

www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the

Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade

dress are trademarks or registered

trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used

with permission.

•Mobile access requires a smartphone

with an active data plan. Standard data

rates may apply.

•Pandora is only available in the United

States.

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 561 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Index

562

Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 451

Accessories and Modifications................. 460

Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 147

Additives

Coolant ................................................... 478

Engine Oil................................................ 472

Washer.................................................... 483

Additives, Engine Oil................................ 472

Adjusting

Armrest ................................................... 141

Front Seats .............................................. 133

Head Restraints........................................ 136

Mirrors .................................................... 130

Rear Seats................................................ 139

Steering Wheel ........................................ 129

Aha™................................................. 209, 262

Air Conditioning System (Climate

Control System)....................................... 157

Changing the Mode ........................ 157, 158

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ............................................... 159

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ........... 157, 158

Sensors.................................................... 162

Synchronized Mode ................................. 161

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 157

Air Conditioning System (Heating and

Cooling System) ...................................... 154

Cooling ................................................... 156

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows............................................... 156

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 509

Heating ................................................... 155

Air Pressure............................... 498, 547, 549

Airbags........................................................ 39

Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45

Airbag Care............................................... 53

Event Data Recorder.................................. 24

Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 42

Indicator........................................ 50, 73, 79

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 51

Sensors ..................................................... 39

Side Airbag Cutoff System......................... 48

Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 52

Side Airbags .............................................. 46

Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 49

AM/FM Radio............................ 171, 193, 232

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 451

Indicator.................................................... 73

Armrest ..................................................... 141

Audio Remote Controls ........................... 168

Audio System............................................ 164

Adjusting the Sound................ 170, 191, 222

Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 165

Error Messages........................................ 268

General Information ................................ 276

HDD........................................................ 242

Internet Radio ................................. 207, 260

iPod®............................................... 203, 252

MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 179, 210, 263

Reactivating ............................................ 166

Recommended CDs ................................ 277

Recommended Devices ........................... 279

Remote Controls..................................... 168

Security Code ......................................... 166

Theft Protection ...................................... 166

Touch Screen .................................. 183, 216

USB Adapter Cable ................................. 165

USB Flash Drives...................................... 280

Authorized Manuals ................................ 557

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 101

Customize ...................................... 298, 309

Automatic Lighting.................................. 120

Automatic Transmission .......................... 425

Creeping................................................. 425

Fluid ....................................................... 480

Kickdown ............................................... 425

Operating the Shift Lever .......... 18, 427, 429

Shift Lever Does Not Move...................... 531

Shifting........................................... 426, 428

Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 165

Battery ...................................................... 506

Charging System Indicator ................ 71, 534

Jump Starting ......................................... 528

Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 506

Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 507

Belts (Seat).................................................. 32

Beverage Holders..................................... 146

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 562 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

563

Index

Bluetooth® Audio............................. 213, 266

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.... 320, 332, 367

Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 65

Brake System ............................................ 449

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 451

Brake Assist System................................. 452

Fluid ....................................................... 481

Foot Brake .............................................. 450

Indicator ........................................... 70, 536

Parking Brake.......................................... 449

Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 125

Bulb Replacement.................................... 484

Brake Light, Taillight, Back-Up Light,

Rear Turn Signal Light and Lower Rear

Side Marker Light................................ 490

Fog Lights ............................................... 486

Front Turn Signal/Parking Light ............... 489

Headlights .............................................. 484

High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 492

Rear License Plate Light........................... 492

Side Marker Lights .................................. 488

Bulb Specifications........................... 546, 548

Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 66

Cargo Hook .............................................. 149

Carrying Cargo ................................. 411, 413

CD Player .................................. 173, 200, 239

Center Pocket........................................... 152

Certification Label ................................... 550

Changing Bulbs......................................... 484

Charging System Indicator................. 71, 534

Child Safety................................................. 54

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 100

Child Seat .................................................... 54

Booster Seats............................................. 65

Child Seat for Infants................................. 56

Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 57

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 61

Larger Children.......................................... 64

Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56

Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58

Childproof Door Locks ............................. 100

Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 512

Cleaning the Interior................................ 510

Climate Control System............................ 157

Changing the Mode ................................ 157

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ............................................... 159

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 509

Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 158

Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 157

Sensors.................................................... 162

Synchronized Mode ................................. 161

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 157

Clock............................................................ 88

Coat Hook ................................................. 148

Compact Spare Tire .................. 517, 547, 549

Compass ............................................ 405, 407

Console Compartment ............................. 145

Controls....................................................... 87

Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 478

Adding to the Radiator............................ 479

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 478

Overheating ............................................ 532

Creeping (Automatic Transmission) ........ 425

Cruise Control........................................... 432

Indicator.................................................... 81

Cup Holders .............................................. 146

Customer Service Information................. 558

Customized Features................................ 281

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 122

Dead Battery............................................. 528

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ......................................... 156, 159

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ............... 551

Dimming

Headlights............................................... 119

Rearview Mirror....................................... 130

Dipstick (Engine Oil)................................. 473

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 119

Display Button.................................. 186, 218

Door Mirrors............................................. 131

Doors........................................................... 91

Auto Door Locking .................................. 101

Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 101

Door and Trunk Open Indicator ................. 74

Door Open Indicator.................................. 31

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 563 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

564

Index

Keys .......................................................... 91

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Inside....................................................... 99

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the

Outside.................................................... 94

Lockout Prevention System ........................ 98

DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 500

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 133

Driving....................................................... 409

Automatic Transmission........................... 425

Braking.................................................... 449

Cruise Control ......................................... 432

Shifting Gear ................................... 426, 428

Starting the Engine .......................... 420, 422

Driving Position Memory System............. 127

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 509

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System

Indicator ............................................ 74, 536

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 442

Emergency................................................. 542

Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 553

Engine ....................................................... 550

Coolant ................................................... 478

Jump Starting .......................................... 528

Oil ........................................................... 472

Starting ........................................... 420, 422

Switch Buzzer .......................................... 114

Engine Coolant......................................... 478

Adding to the Radiator............................ 479

Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 478

Overheating ............................................ 532

Temperature Gauge .................................. 83

Engine Oil ................................................. 472

Adding.................................................... 475

Checking................................................. 473

Displaying Oil Life.................................... 465

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 472

ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 115

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

System ............................................... 74, 536

Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 66

Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 512

Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 131

Features .................................................... 163

Filters

Dust and Pollen ....................................... 509

Oil........................................................... 476

Flat Tire ..................................................... 517

Floor Mats................................................. 511

Fluids

Automatic Transmission .......................... 480

Brake ...................................................... 481

Engine Coolant ....................................... 478

Windshield Washer ................................. 483

Fog Light Indicator .................................... 79

Folding Down the Rear Seats.................. 139

Foot Brake ................................................ 450

Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42

Front Seats................................................ 133

Adjusting ................................................ 133

Fuel ..................................................... 19, 456

Economy................................................. 459

Gauge ...................................................... 83

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72

Recommendation.................................... 456

Refueling ................................................ 456

Fuel Economy ........................................... 459

Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 19, 458

Message ................................................. 535

Fuel Fill Door ............................................ 457

Fuses ......................................................... 538

Inspecting and Changing ........................ 541

Locations ........................................ 538, 539

Gasoline (Fuel)

Economy................................................. 459

Gauge ...................................................... 83

Information............................................. 456

Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72

Refueling ................................................ 456

Gauges........................................................ 83

Gear Shift Lever Positions

Automatic Transmission .................. 426, 428

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 564 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

565

Index

Glass (care) ............................................... 513

Glove Box ................................................. 144

Halogen Bulbs .......................................... 486

Handling the Unexpected ....................... 515

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) .............. 320, 332, 367

Auto Answer .................................. 347, 382

Automatic Import of Cellular

Phonebook and Call History .......... 349, 384

Automatic Transferring ................... 347, 382

Displaying Messages ....................... 362, 401

Editing User Name .................................. 381

HFL Buttons ............................ 320, 332, 367

HFL Menus.............................. 322, 334, 369

HFL Status Display................... 321, 333, 368

Limitations for Manual Operation.... 333, 368

Making a Call ................................. 353, 393

Options During a Call...................... 359, 398

Phone Setup ........................... 324, 339, 373

Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 388

Receiving a Call............................... 358, 397

Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ..... 360, 399

Ring Tone ....................................... 348, 383

Selecting a Mail Account................. 361, 400

Speed Dial ...................................... 350, 385

To Create a Security PIN.................. 346, 380

To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail

Options......................................... 344, 378

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio .................. 242

Hazard Warning Button............................... 2

Head Restraints......................................... 136

Headlights................................................. 119

Aiming .................................................... 484

Automatic Operation............................... 120

Dimming ......................................... 119, 122

Operating ................................................ 119

Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 153

Heating and Cooling System ................... 154

Cooling ................................................... 156

Defrosting the Windshield and

Windows ............................................... 156

Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 509

Heating ................................................... 155

HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............... 320, 332, 367

High Beam Indicator .................................. 79

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ............ 318

Identification Numbers

Engine and Transmission ......................... 550

Vehicle Identification ............................... 550

Ignition Switch.......................................... 114

Illumination Control ................................. 125

Knob ....................................................... 125

Immobilizer System .................................. 107

Indicator.................................................... 80

Indicators .................................................... 70

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 73

Charging System ............................... 71, 534

CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 81, 433

CRUISE MAIN.................................... 81, 432

Door and Trunk Open ............................... 74

Door Open................................................ 31

EPS (Electric Power Steering) System.. 74, 536

Fog Light................................................... 79

Forward Collision Warning (FCW).............. 76

High Beam ................................................ 79

Immobilizer System ................................... 80

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 77

Lights On .................................................. 79

Low Fuel ................................................... 72

Low Oil Pressure................................ 70, 534

Low Tire Pressure ...................... 75, 446, 447

Maintenance Minder ......................... 81, 465

Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 71, 535

Parking Brake and Brake System........ 70, 536

Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 33, 71

Security System Alarm ............................... 80

Side Airbag Off ................................... 52, 79

Smart Entry System ................................... 78

Starter System........................................... 78

Supplemental Restraint System............ 50, 73

TPMS ................................................ 75, 448

Transmission ............................................. 72

Turn Signal................................................ 78

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System ............................................ 73, 442

VSA® OFF .......................................... 73, 443

Washer Level............................................. 81

Information .............................................. 545

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 565 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

566

Index

Information Display.................................... 84

Instrument Panel ........................................ 69

Brightness Control ................................... 125

Interface Dial ............................................ 215

Interior Lights ........................................... 142

Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 130

Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 521

Jump Starting............................................ 528

Key Number Tag ......................................... 92

Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 98

Keys ............................................................. 91

Lockout Prevention.................................... 98

Master Keys............................................... 91

Number Tag .............................................. 92

Rear Door Won’t Open ............................ 100

Remote Transmitter ................................... 94

Types and Functions .................................. 91

Valet Key................................................... 92

Won’t Turn................................................ 22

Kickdown (Automatic Transmission) ....... 425

Lane Departure Warning (LDW).............. 439

LaneWatch™............................................. 444

Language (HFL)......................... 321, 333, 368

LATCH (Child Seats).............................. 59, 62

Lights................................................. 119, 484

Automatic ............................................... 120

Bulb Replacement ................................... 484

Daytime Running Lights........................... 122

Fog Lights ............................................... 122

High Beam Indicator.................................. 79

Interior .................................................... 142

Light Switches ......................................... 119

Lights On Indicator .................................... 79

Turn Signals ............................................ 119

Load Limits................................................ 413

Locking/Unlocking...................................... 91

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.................. 101

Childproof Door Locks............................. 100

From Inside ............................................... 99

From Outside ............................................ 94

Keys .......................................................... 91

Using a Key ............................................... 98

Lockout Prevention System ....................... 98

Low Battery Charge ................................. 534

Low Fuel Indicator...................................... 72

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534

Lower Anchors...................................... 59, 62

Lubricant Specifications Chart......... 546, 548

Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 413

Maintenance............................................. 461

Battery .................................................... 506

Brake Fluid.............................................. 481

Cleaning ................................................. 510

Climate Control System .......................... 509

Coolant .................................................. 478

Heating and Cooling System ................... 509

Maintenance Minder™ ........................... 465

Oil .......................................................... 473

Precautions ............................................. 462

Radiator.................................................. 479

Remote Transmitter ................................ 507

Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 484

Safety ..................................................... 463

Service Items........................................... 467

Tires........................................................ 497

Transmission Fluid................................... 480

Under the Hood...................................... 469

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 71, 535

Map Lights................................................ 143

Maximum Load Limit............................... 413

Meters, Gauges .......................................... 83

Mirrors ...................................................... 130

Adjusting ................................................ 130

Door ....................................................... 131

Exterior ................................................... 131

Interior Rearview..................................... 130

Modifications (and Accessories).............. 460

Moonroof ................................................. 113

MP3................... 173, 179, 200, 210, 239, 263

Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 455

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 566 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

567

Index

Numbers (Identification) ......................... 550

Odometer ................................................... 84

Oil (Engine) .............................................. 472

Adding ................................................... 475

Checking ................................................ 473

Displaying Oil Life ................................... 465

Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 70, 534

Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 472

Viscosity.................................................. 472

Opening/Closing

Hood ...................................................... 471

Moonroof ............................................... 113

Power Windows...................................... 110

Tailgate................................................... 105

Outside Temperature ................................ 86

Adjusting .................................................. 86

Overheating ............................................. 532

Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift

Mode) ..................................................... 430

Pandora®.......................................... 208, 261

Panic Mode............................................... 109

Parking ..................................................... 453

Parking Brake........................................... 449

Parking Brake and Brake System

Indicator ............................................ 70, 536

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 51

Passing Indicators ..................................... 119

Power Windows........................................ 110

Precautions While Driving ....................... 424

Rain......................................................... 424

Pregnant Women ....................................... 37

Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 517

Radiator .................................................... 479

Radio (AM/FM).......................... 171, 193, 232

Radio (XM®)...................................... 197, 236

Radio Data System (RDS).......... 172, 195, 234

RDS (Radio Data System).......... 172, 195, 234

Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 553

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror

Button ..................................................... 126

Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 139

Rearview Mirror........................................ 130

Refueling................................................... 456

Fuel Gauge................................................ 83

Gasoline .................................. 456, 546, 548

Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72

Regulations ............................... 447, 500, 551

Remote Transmitter ................................... 94

Replacement

Battery .................................................... 507

Bulbs ....................................................... 484

Front Wiper Blade Rubber ....................... 493

Fuses............................................... 538, 539

Rear Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 495

Tires ........................................................ 503

Reporting Safety Defects......................... 552

Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 85

Safe Driving ................................................ 27

Safety Check ............................................... 31

Safety Labels............................................... 67

Safety Message........................................... 25

Seat Belts .................................................... 32

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 36

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 34

Checking................................................... 38

Fastening .................................................. 35

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Seat Belt ................................... 61

Pregnant Women ...................................... 37

Reminder .................................................. 33

Warning Indicator ............................... 33, 71

Seat Heaters.............................................. 153

Seats .......................................................... 133

Adjusting ................................................ 133

Driver’s Seat Lumbar Support .................. 133

Front Seats .............................................. 133

Rear Seats ............................................... 139

Seat Heaters............................................ 153

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 567 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

568

Index

Security System ......................................... 107

Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 80

Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 80

Select Lever ................................. 18, 426, 428

Operation .................................. 18, 427, 429

Releasing................................................. 531

Won’t Move ............................................ 531

Select/Reset Knob ....................................... 84

Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 58

Selector Knob (Audio) ...................... 169, 182

Sequential Shift Mode.............................. 430

Setting the Clock ........................................ 88

Shift Lever ................................... 18, 426, 428

Shift Lever Position Indicator........... 427, 429

Shifting (Transmission)..................... 426, 428

Shoulder Anchor......................................... 36

Side Airbags ................................................ 46

Cutoff System............................................ 48

Off Indicator .............................................. 48

Side Curtain Airbags................................... 49

Smart Entry with Push Button Start

System........................................................ 96

Snow Tires ................................................. 505

Spare Tire .................................. 517, 547, 549

Spark Plugs........................................ 546, 548

Specifications ............................................ 546

Specified Fuel............................ 456, 546, 548

Speedometer............................................... 83

SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 42

Starting the Engine .......................... 420, 422

Does Not Start ......................................... 525

Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 114

Jump Starting.......................................... 528

Steering Wheel......................................... 129

Adjusting ................................................ 129

Stopping ................................................... 453

Summer Tires ............................................ 505

Sunglasses Holder..................................... 152

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 42

Switches (Around the Steering

Wheel)............................................. 2, 3, 114

Synchronized Mode ................................. 161

Tachometer................................................. 83

Tailgate ..................................................... 105

Unable to Open....................................... 544

Temperature Gauge................................... 83

Temperature Sensor................................. 162

Time (Setting) ............................................. 88

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ..................................................... 446

Indicator............................................ 75, 537

Tires........................................................... 497

Air Pressure ............................. 498, 547, 549

Checking and Maintaining ...................... 497

Inspection ............................................... 497

Labeling .................................................. 498

Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 517

Regulations ............................................. 500

Rotation .................................................. 504

Spare Tire ............................... 517, 547, 549

Summer.................................................. 505

Tire Chains.............................................. 505

Wear Indicators....................................... 502

Winter .................................................... 505

Tools ......................................................... 516

Towing a Trailer....................................... 415

Equipment and Accessories..................... 416

Load Limits ............................................. 415

Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 419

Emergency.............................................. 542

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System).................................................... 446

Indicator ........................................... 75, 537

Transmission..................................... 426, 428

Automatic....................................... 426, 428

Fluid ....................................................... 480

Number .................................................. 550

Shift Lever Position Indicator ........... 427, 429

Trip Meter .................................................. 85

Troubleshooting ...................................... 515

Blown Fuse ..................................... 538, 539

Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 22

Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 23

Emergency Towing ................................. 542

Engine Won’t Start ................................. 525

Noise When Braking ................................. 23

Overheating............................................ 532

Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 517

Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 22, 100

Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 531

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 568 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

569

Index

Warning Indicators.................................... 70

Trunk

Light Bulb ....................................... 546, 548

Turn Signals.............................................. 119

Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 78

Unlocking the Doors.................................. 94

USB Adapter Cable .......................... 164, 165

USB Flash Drives ....................................... 280

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button

Start System.............................................. 96

Valet Key .................................................... 92

Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 5

Vehicle Identification Number................ 550

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)................. 442

Off Button .............................................. 443

Off Indicator ............................................. 73

System Indicator ....................................... 73

Ventilation ............................................... 158

Viscosity (Oil)............................ 472, 547, 549

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 442

Warning and Information Messages ........ 82

Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 534

Warning Labels .......................................... 67

Warranties (Warranty Manual provided

separately)............................................... 555

Watts ................................................. 546, 548

Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 502

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 521

Window Washers...................................... 123

Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 483

Switch ..................................................... 123

Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 110

Windshield ................................................ 123

Cleaning.................................................. 513

Defrosting/Defogging ...................... 156, 159

Washer Fluid ........................................... 483

Wiper Blades ........................................... 493

Wipers and Washers................................ 123

Winter Tires .............................................. 505

Snow Tires............................................... 505

Tire Chains .............................................. 505

Wipers and Washers................................. 123

Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 493

Front ....................................................... 123

Rear ........................................................ 124

WMA ................. 173, 179, 200, 210, 239, 263

Worn Tires................................................. 497

XM® Radio......................................... 197, 236

13 CROSSTOUR-31TP66300.book 569 ページ２０１２年９月２７日　木曜日　午後３時２７分

Honda 2013 Crosstour Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Crosstour-Unlinked-Owners-Manual-106992 honda-2013-crosstour-unlinked-owners-manual-106992

Owners Manual Pdf P61313 2013 Honda Crosstour Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation